diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1')
93 files changed, 12058 insertions, 0 deletions
| diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/basename.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/basename.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..036ef43 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/basename.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +BASENAME(1)              User Commands              BASENAME(1) + + + + + +NAME +       basename - strip directory and suffix from filenames + +SYNOPSIS +       basename NAME [SUFFIX] +       basename OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Print   NAME   with  any  leading  directory  components +       removed.  If specified, also remove a trailing SUFFIX. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by FIXME unknown. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for basename is maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If the info and basename programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info basename + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +basename 5.3.0           November 2004              BASENAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cat.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cat.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3672f0f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cat.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +CAT(1)                   User Commands                   CAT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       cat - concatenate files and print on the standard output + +SYNOPSIS +       cat [OPTION] [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Concatenate FILE(s), or standard input, to standard out- +       put. + +       -A, --show-all +              equivalent to -vET + +       -b, --number-nonblank +              number nonblank output lines + +       -e     equivalent to -vE + +       -E, --show-ends +              display $ at end of each line + +       -n, --number +              number all output lines + +       -s, --squeeze-blank +              never more than one single blank line + +       -t     equivalent to -vT + +       -T, --show-tabs +              display TAB characters as ^I + +       -u     (ignored) + +       -v, --show-nonprinting +              use ^ and M- notation, except for LFD and TAB + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Torbjorn Granlund and Richard M. Stallman. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for cat is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and cat programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info cat + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chgrp.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chgrp.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ba4c4a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chgrp.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +CHGRP(1)                 User Commands                 CHGRP(1) + + + + + +NAME +       chgrp - change group ownership + +SYNOPSIS +       chgrp [OPTION]... GROUP FILE... +       chgrp [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE... + +DESCRIPTION +       Change  the  group of each FILE to GROUP.  With --refer- +       ence, change the group of each FILE to that of RFILE. + +       -c, --changes +              like verbose but report only  when  a  change  is +              made + +       --dereference +              affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather +              than  the  symbolic  link  itself  (this  is  the +              default) + +       -h, --no-dereference +              affect  each  symbolic link instead of any refer- +              enced file  (useful  only  on  systems  that  can +              change the ownership of a symlink) + +       --no-preserve-root  do  not  treat  `/'  specially  (the +              default) + +       --preserve-root +              fail to operate recursively on `/' + +       -f, --silent, --quiet +              suppress most error messages + +       --reference=RFILE +              use RFILE's  group  rather  than  the  specifying +              GROUP value + +       -R, --recursive +              operate on files and directories recursively + +       -v, --verbose +              output a diagnostic for every file processed + +       The  following  options  modify  how a hierarchy is tra- +       versed when the -R option is also  specified.   If  more +       than  one is specified, only the final one takes effect. + +       -H     if a command line argument is a symbolic link  to +              a directory, traverse it + +       -L     traverse  every  symbolic  link  to  a  directory +              encountered + +       -P     do not traverse any symbolic links (default) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for chgrp is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and chgrp programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info chgrp + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chgrp 5.3.0              November 2004                 CHGRP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chmod.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chmod.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..273bb40 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chmod.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +CHMOD(1)                 User Commands                 CHMOD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       chmod - change file access permissions + +SYNOPSIS +       chmod [OPTION]... MODE[,MODE]... FILE... +       chmod [OPTION]... OCTAL-MODE FILE... +       chmod [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE... + +DESCRIPTION +       This  manual  page  documents  the GNU version of chmod. +       chmod changes the permissions of each given file accord- +       ing  to mode, which can be either a symbolic representa- +       tion of changes to make, or an octal number representing +       the bit pattern for the new permissions. + +       The format of a symbolic mode is `[ugoa...][[+-=][rwxXs- +       tugo...]...][,...]'.  Multiple symbolic  operations  can +       be given, separated by commas. + +       A  combination  of  the  letters  `ugoa'  controls which +       users' access to the file will be changed: the user  who +       owns  it (u), other users in the file's group (g), other +       users not in the file's group (o), or all users (a).  If +       none  of  these  are given, the effect is as if `a' were +       given, but bits that  are  set  in  the  umask  are  not +       affected. + +       The  operator  `+' causes the permissions selected to be +       added to the existing  permissions  of  each  file;  `-' +       causes them to be removed; and `=' causes them to be the +       only permissions that the file has. + +       The letters `rwxXstugo' select the new  permissions  for +       the  affected  users:  read  (r), write (w), execute (or +       access for directories) (x), execute only if the file is +       a  directory  or already has execute permission for some +       user (X), set user or group ID on execution (s),  sticky +       (t),  the  permissions  granted to the user who owns the +       file (u), the permissions granted to other users who are +       members  of  the  file's  group (g), and the permissions +       granted to users that are in neither of the two  preced- +       ing categories (o). + +       A  numeric  mode is from one to four octal digits (0-7), +       derived by adding up the bits with values 4, 2,  and  1. +       Any omitted digits are assumed to be leading zeros.  The +       first digit selects the set user ID (4) and set group ID +       (2) and sticky (1) attributes.  The second digit selects +       permissions for the user who owns the  file:  read  (4), +       write  (2),  and  execute (1); the third selects permis- +       sions for other users in the file's group, with the same +       values; and the fourth for other users not in the file's +       group, with the same values. + +       chmod never changes the permissions of  symbolic  links; +       the  chmod  system call cannot change their permissions. +       This is not a problem since the permissions of  symbolic +       links  are  never used.  However, for each symbolic link +       listed on the command line, chmod  changes  the  permis- +       sions  of  the  pointed-to  file.   In  contrast,  chmod +       ignores  symbolic  links  encountered  during  recursive +       directory traversals. + +STICKY FILES +       On  older Unix systems, the sticky bit caused executable +       files to be hoarded in swap space.  This feature is  not +       useful  on  modern  VM  systems,  and  the  Linux kernel +       ignores the sticky bit on files.  Other kernels may  use +       the sticky bit on files for system-defined purposes.  On +       some systems, only the superuser can set the sticky  bit +       on files. + +STICKY DIRECTORIES +       When the sticky bit is set on a directory, files in that +       directory may be unlinked or renamed  only  by  root  or +       their  owner.   Without  the  sticky bit, anyone able to +       write to the directory can delete or rename files.   The +       sticky  bit  is  commonly  found on directories, such as +       /tmp, that are world-writable. + +OPTIONS +       Change the mode of each FILE to MODE. + +       -c, --changes +              like verbose but report only  when  a  change  is +              made + +       --no-preserve-root +              do not treat `/' specially (the default) + +       --preserve-root +              fail to operate recursively on `/' + +       -f, --silent, --quiet +              suppress most error messages + +       -v, --verbose +              output a diagnostic for every file processed + +       --reference=RFILE +              use RFILE's mode instead of MODE values + +       -R, --recursive +              change files and directories recursively + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Each MODE is one or more of the letters ugoa, one of the +       symbols +-= and one or more of the letters rwxXstugo. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for chmod is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and chmod programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info chmod + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chmod 5.3.0              November 2004                 CHMOD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chown.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chown.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9daec34 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chown.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +CHOWN(1)                 User Commands                 CHOWN(1) + + + + + +NAME +       chown - change file owner and group + +SYNOPSIS +       chown [OPTION]... [OWNER][:[GROUP]] FILE... +       chown [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE... + +DESCRIPTION +       This  manual  page  documents  the GNU version of chown. +       chown changes the user and/or group  ownership  of  each +       given  file, according to its first non-option argument, +       which is interpreted as follows.  If only  a  user  name +       (or  numeric  user  ID)  is given, that user is made the +       owner of each given file, and the files'  group  is  not +       changed.  If the user name is followed by a colon or dot +       and a group name (or numeric group ID), with  no  spaces +       between  them,  the  group  ownership  of  the  files is +       changed as well.  If a colon or dot but  no  group  name +       follows  the  user  name, that user is made the owner of +       the files and the group of the files is changed to  that +       user's  login  group.  If the colon or dot and group are +       given, but the user name is omitted, only the  group  of +       the  files  is changed; in this case, chown performs the +       same function as chgrp. + +OPTIONS +       Change the owner and/or group  of  each  FILE  to  OWNER +       and/or  GROUP.   With  --reference, change the owner and +       group of each FILE to those of RFILE. + +       -c, --changes +              like verbose but report only  when  a  change  is +              made + +       --dereference +              affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather +              than  the  symbolic  link  itself  (this  is  the +              default) + +       -h, --no-dereference +              affect  each  symbolic link instead of any refer- +              enced file  (useful  only  on  systems  that  can +              change the ownership of a symlink) + +       --from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP +              change  the  owner and/or group of each file only +              if its current owner  and/or  group  match  those +              specified  here.  Either may be omitted, in which +              case a match is  not  required  for  the  omitted +              attribute. + +       --no-preserve-root  do  not  treat  `/'  specially  (the +              default) + +       --preserve-root +              fail to operate recursively on `/' + +       -f, --silent, --quiet +              suppress most error messages + +       --reference=RFILE +              use RFILE's owner and group rather than the spec- +              ifying OWNER:GROUP values + +       -R, --recursive +              operate on files and directories recursively + +       -v, --verbose +              output a diagnostic for every file processed + +       The  following  options  modify  how a hierarchy is tra- +       versed when the -R option is also  specified.   If  more +       than  one is specified, only the final one takes effect. + +       -H     if a command line argument is a symbolic link  to +              a directory, traverse it + +       -L     traverse  every  symbolic  link  to  a  directory +              encountered + +       -P     do not traverse any symbolic links (default) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Owner is unchanged if missing.  Group  is  unchanged  if +       missing,  but changed to login group if implied by a `:' +       following a symbolic OWNER.   OWNER  and  GROUP  may  be +       numeric as well as symbolic. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for chown is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and chown programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info chown + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chown 5.3.0              November 2004                 CHOWN(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chroot.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chroot.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9a639f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/chroot.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +CHROOT(1)                User Commands                CHROOT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       chroot  -  run command or interactive shell with special +       root directory + +SYNOPSIS +       chroot NEWROOT [COMMAND...] +       chroot OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Run COMMAND with root directory set to NEWROOT. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If no command is given, run  ``${SHELL}  -i''  (default: +       /bin/sh). + +AUTHOR +       Written by Roland McGrath. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for  chroot is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info  and  chroot  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info chroot + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +chroot 5.3.0             November 2004                CHROOT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cksum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cksum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b21f41f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cksum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +CKSUM(1)                 User Commands                 CKSUM(1) + + + + + +NAME +       cksum - checksum and count the bytes in a file + +SYNOPSIS +       cksum [FILE]... +       cksum [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print CRC checksum and byte counts of each FILE. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Q. Frank Xia. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for cksum is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and cksum programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info cksum + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +cksum (coreutils) 5.3.0  November 2004                 CKSUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/comm.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/comm.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2ac7f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/comm.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +COMM(1)                  User Commands                  COMM(1) + + + + + +NAME +       comm - compare two sorted files line by line + +SYNOPSIS +       comm [OPTION]... FILE1 FILE2 + +DESCRIPTION +       Compare sorted files FILE1 and FILE2 line by line. + +       With  no  options,  produce three-column output.  Column +       one contains lines unique to FILE1, column two  contains +       lines  unique  to FILE2, and column three contains lines +       common to both files. + +       -1     suppress lines unique to FILE1 + +       -2     suppress lines unique to FILE2 + +       -3     suppress lines that appear in both files + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for comm is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and comm programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info comm + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +comm 5.3.0               December 2004                  COMM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cp.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cp.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c30a403 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cp.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +CP(1)                    User Commands                    CP(1) + + + + + +NAME +       cp - copy files and directories + +SYNOPSIS +       cp [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST +       cp [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY +       cp [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE... + +DESCRIPTION +       Copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -a, --archive +              same as -dpR + +       --backup[=CONTROL] +              make a backup of each existing destination file + +       -b     like --backup but does not accept an argument + +       --copy-contents +              copy contents of special files when recursive + +       -d     same as --no-dereference --preserve=link + +       --no-dereference +              never follow symbolic links + +       -f, --force +              if an existing destination file cannot be opened, +              remove it and try again + +       -i, --interactive +              prompt before overwrite + +       -H     follow command-line symbolic links + +       -l, --link +              link files instead of copying + +       -L, --dereference +              always follow symbolic links + +       -p     same as --preserve=mode,ownership,timestamps + +       --preserve[=ATTR_LIST] +              preserve  the  specified   attributes   (default: +              mode,ownership,timestamps),   if  possible  addi- +              tional attributes: links, all + +       --no-preserve=ATTR_LIST +              don't preserve the specified attributes + +       --parents +              append source path to DIRECTORY + +       -P     same as `--no-dereference' + +       -R, -r, --recursive +              copy directories recursively + +       --remove-destination +              remove  each  existing  destination  file  before +              attempting to open it (contrast with --force) + +       --reply={yes,no,query} +              specify  how to handle the prompt about an exist- +              ing destination file + +       --sparse=WHEN +              control creation of sparse files + +       --strip-trailing-slashes  remove  any  trailing  slashes +       from each SOURCE +              argument + +       -s, --symbolic-link +              make symbolic links instead of copying + +       -S, --suffix=SUFFIX +              override the usual backup suffix + +       -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY +              copy all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY + +       -T, --no-target-directory +              treat DEST as a normal file + +       -u, --update +              copy only when the SOURCE file is newer than  the +              destination  file or when the destination file is +              missing + +       -v, --verbose +              explain what is being done + +       -x, --one-file-system +              stay on this file system + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       By default, sparse SOURCE files are detected by a  crude +       heuristic and the corresponding DEST file is made sparse +       as   well.    That   is   the   behavior   selected   by +       --sparse=auto.   Specify  --sparse=always  to  create  a +       sparse DEST file whenever the  SOURCE  file  contains  a +       long  enough sequence of zero bytes.  Use --sparse=never +       to inhibit creation of sparse files. + +       The backup suffix is `~', unless set  with  --suffix  or +       SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.  The version control method may be +       selected via the --backup option  or  through  the  VER- +       SION_CONTROL environment variable.  Here are the values: + +       none, off +              never make backups (even if --backup is given) + +       numbered, t +              make numbered backups + +       existing, nil +              numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- +              wise + +       simple, never +              always make simple backups + +       As  a special case, cp makes a backup of SOURCE when the +       force and backup options are given and SOURCE  and  DEST +       are the same name for an existing, regular file. + +AUTHOR +       Written  by  Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, and Jim +       Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for cp is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  cp  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info cp + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +cp 5.3.0                 November 2004                    CP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/csplit.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/csplit.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0061fc --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/csplit.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +CSPLIT(1)                User Commands                CSPLIT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       csplit  -  split a file into sections determined by con- +       text lines + +SYNOPSIS +       csplit [OPTION]... FILE PATTERN... + +DESCRIPTION +       Output pieces of FILE separated by PATTERN(s)  to  files +       `xx01',  `xx02',  ...,  and  output  byte counts of each +       piece to standard output. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -b, --suffix-format=FORMAT use sprintf FORMAT instead of +              %02d + +       -f, --prefix=PREFIX +              use PREFIX instead of `xx' + +       -k, --keep-files +              do not remove output files on errors + +       -n, --digits=DIGITS +              use specified number of digits instead of 2 + +       -s, --quiet, --silent +              do not print counts of output file sizes + +       -z, --elide-empty-files +              remove empty output files + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Read standard input if FILE is -.  Each PATTERN may be: + +       INTEGER +              copy up to but not including specified line  num- +              ber + +       /REGEXP/[OFFSET] +              copy up to but not including a matching line + +       %REGEXP%[OFFSET] +              skip to, but not including a matching line + +       {INTEGER} +              repeat  the  previous pattern specified number of +              times + +       {*}    repeat the previous pattern as many times as pos- +              sible + +       A  line  OFFSET  is  a required `+' or `-' followed by a +       positive integer. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Stuart Kemp and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for csplit  is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the  info and csplit programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info csplit + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +csplit 5.3.0             December 2004                CSPLIT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cut.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cut.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c706e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/cut.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +CUT(1)                   User Commands                   CUT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       cut - remove sections from each line of files + +SYNOPSIS +       cut [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print selected parts of lines from each FILE to standard +       output. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -b, --bytes=LIST +              select only these bytes + +       -c, --characters=LIST +              select only these characters + +       -d, --delimiter=DELIM +              use DELIM instead of TAB for field delimiter + +       -f, --fields=LIST +              select  only  these  fields;  also print any line +              that contains no delimiter character, unless  the +              -s option is specified + +       -n     (ignored) + +       --complement +              complement  the set of selected bytes, characters +              or fields. + +       -s, --only-delimited +              do not print lines not containing delimiters + +       --output-delimiter=STRING +              use STRING as the output delimiter the default is +              to use the input delimiter + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Use  one,  and  only  one of -b, -c or -f.  Each LIST is +       made up of one range, or many ranges separated  by  com- +       mas.   Selected  input is written in the same order that +       it is read, and is written exactly once.  Each range  is +       one of: + +       N      N'th byte, character or field, counted from 1 + +       N-     from  N'th  byte,  character  or field, to end of +              line + +       N-M    from N'th to M'th (included) byte,  character  or +              field + +       -M     from  first to M'th (included) byte, character or +              field + +       With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David Ihnat, David MacKenzie, and Jim  Meyer- +       ing. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for cut is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and cut programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info cut + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +cut 5.3.0                December 2004                   CUT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/date.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/date.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e98235 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/date.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +DATE(1)                  User Commands                  DATE(1) + + + + + +NAME +       date - print or set the system date and time + +SYNOPSIS +       date [OPTION]... [+FORMAT] +       date [-u|--utc|--universal] [MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]] + +DESCRIPTION +       Display the current time in the given FORMAT, or set the +       system date. + +       -d, --date=STRING +              display time described by STRING, not `now' + +       -f, --file=DATEFILE +              like --date once for each line of DATEFILE + +       --iso-8601[=TIMESPEC] output date/time in ISO 8601  for- +       mat. +              TIMESPEC=`date'  for  date  only  (the  default), +              `hours',  `minutes',  `seconds', or `ns' for date +              and time to the indicated precision. + +       -r, --reference=FILE +              display the last modification time of FILE + +       -R, --rfc-2822 +              output RFC-2822 compliant date string + +       -s, --set=STRING +              set time described by STRING + +       -u, --utc, --universal +              print or set Coordinated Universal Time + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       FORMAT controls the output.  The only valid  option  for +       the  second  form  specifies Coordinated Universal Time. +       Interpreted sequences are: + +       %%     a literal % + +       %a     locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat) + +       %A     locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sun- +              day..Saturday) + +       %b     locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec) + +       %B     locale's  full  month name, variable length (Jan- +              uary..December) + +       %c     locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04  12:02:33  EST +              1989) + +       %C     century  (year divided by 100 and truncated to an +              integer) [00-99] + +       %d     day of month (01..31) + +       %D     date (mm/dd/yy) + +       %e     day of month, blank padded ( 1..31) + +       %F     same as %Y-%m-%d + +       %g     the 2-digit year corresponding  to  the  %V  week +              number + +       %G     the  4-digit  year  corresponding  to the %V week +              number + +       %h     same as %b + +       %H     hour (00..23) + +       %I     hour (01..12) + +       %j     day of year (001..366) + +       %k     hour ( 0..23) + +       %l     hour ( 1..12) + +       %m     month (01..12) + +       %M     minute (00..59) + +       %n     a newline + +       %N     nanoseconds (000000000..999999999) + +       %p     locale's upper case AM or PM indicator (blank  in +              many locales) + +       %P     locale's  lower case am or pm indicator (blank in +              many locales) + +       %r     time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M) + +       %R     time, 24-hour (hh:mm) + +       %s     seconds since `00:00:00 1970-01-01  UTC'  (a  GNU +              extension) + +       %S     second  (00..60); the 60 is necessary to accommo- +              date a leap second + +       %t     a horizontal tab + +       %T     time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss) + +       %u     day of week (1..7);  1 represents Monday + +       %U     week number of year with Sunday as first  day  of +              week (00..53) + +       %V     week  number  of year with Monday as first day of +              week (01..53) + +       %w     day of week (0..6);  0 represents Sunday + +       %W     week number of year with Monday as first  day  of +              week (00..53) + +       %x     locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy) + +       %X     locale's time representation (%H:%M:%S) + +       %y     last two digits of year (00..99) + +       %Y     year (1970...) + +       %z     RFC-2822  style  numeric timezone (-0500) (a non- +              standard extension) + +       %Z     time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone +              is determinable + +       By  default,  date pads numeric fields with zeroes.  GNU +       date recognizes the following modifiers between `%'  and +       a numeric directive. + +              `-'  (hyphen)  do  not  pad the field `_' (under- +              score) pad the field with spaces + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for date is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and date programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info date + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +date 5.3.0               November 2004                  DATE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dd.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dd.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a89f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dd.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +DD(1)                    User Commands                    DD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       dd - convert and copy a file + +SYNOPSIS +       dd [OPERAND]... +       dd OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Copy  a file, converting and formatting according to the +       operands. + +       bs=BYTES +              force ibs=BYTES and obs=BYTES + +       cbs=BYTES +              convert BYTES bytes at a time + +       conv=CONVS +              convert the file as per the comma separated  sym- +              bol list + +       count=BLOCKS +              copy only BLOCKS input blocks + +       ibs=BYTES +              read BYTES bytes at a time + +       if=FILE +              read from FILE instead of stdin + +       iflag=FLAGS +              read as per the comma separated symbol list + +       obs=BYTES +              write BYTES bytes at a time + +       of=FILE +              write to FILE instead of stdout + +       oflag=FLAGS +              write as per the comma separated symbol list + +       seek=BLOCKS +              skip BLOCKS obs-sized blocks at start of output + +       skip=BLOCKS +              skip BLOCKS ibs-sized blocks at start of input + +       status=noxfer +              suppress transfer statistics + +       BLOCKS and BYTES may be followed by the following multi- +       plicative suffixes: xM M, c 1, w 2, b 512,  kB  1000,  K +       1024,  MB  1000*1000,  M 1024*1024, GB 1000*1000*1000, G +       1024*1024*1024, and so on for T, P, E, Z, Y. + +       Each CONV symbol may be: + +       ascii  from EBCDIC to ASCII + +       ebcdic from ASCII to EBCDIC + +       ibm    from ASCII to alternate EBCDIC + +       block  pad newline-terminated  records  with  spaces  to +              cbs-size + +       unblock +              replace  trailing spaces in cbs-size records with +              newline + +       lcase  change upper case to lower case + +       nocreat +              do not create the output file + +       excl   fail if the output file already exists + +       notrunc +              do not truncate the output file + +       ucase  change lower case to upper case + +       swab   swap every pair of input bytes + +       noerror +              continue after read errors + +       sync   pad every input block with NULs to ibs-size; when +              used + +              with  block  or  unblock,  pad with spaces rather +              than NULs + +              fdatasync  physically  write  output  file   data +              before  finishing  fsync      likewise,  but also +              write metadata + +       Each FLAG symbol may be: + +       append append mode (makes sense only for output) + +       direct use direct I/O for data + +       dsync  use synchronized I/O for data + +       sync   likewise, but also for metadata + +       nonblock +              use non-blocking I/O + +       nofollow +              do not follow symlinks + +       noctty do not assign controlling terminal from file + +       Sending a SIGUSR1 signal to a running `dd' process makes +       it  print  I/O  statistics  to  standard  error, then to +       resume copying. + +              $ dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/null& pid=$! +              $ kill -USR1 $pid; sleep 1; kill $pid + +              18335302+0  records  in  18335302+0  records  out +              9387674624  bytes  (9.4  GB) copied, 34.6279 sec- +              onds, 271 MB/s + +       Options are: + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, and Stuart Kemp. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for dd is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  dd  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info dd + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dd (coreutils) 5.3.0     November 2004                    DD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/df.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/df.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2b42a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/df.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +DF(1)                    User Commands                    DF(1) + + + + + +NAME +       df - report file system disk space usage + +SYNOPSIS +       df [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       This  manual  page  documents the GNU version of df.  df +       displays the amount of disk space available on the  file +       system  containing  each file name argument.  If no file +       name is given, the  space  available  on  all  currently +       mounted  file  systems is shown.  Disk space is shown in +       1K blocks by default, unless  the  environment  variable +       POSIXLY_CORRECT  is  set,  in which case 512-byte blocks +       are used. + +       If an argument is the  absolute  file  name  of  a  disk +       device  node  containing a mounted file system, df shows +       the space available on that file system rather  than  on +       the  file  system  containing  the device node (which is +       always the root file system).  This version of df cannot +       show  the  space  available  on  unmounted file systems, +       because on most kinds of systems doing so requires  very +       nonportable  intimate  knowledge  of  file system struc- +       tures. + +OPTIONS +       Show information about the file  system  on  which  each +       FILE resides, or all file systems by default. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -a, --all +              include file systems having 0 blocks + +       -B, --block-size=SIZE use SIZE-byte blocks + +       -h, --human-readable +              print sizes in human readable  format  (e.g.,  1K +              234M 2G) + +       -H, --si +              likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + +       -i, --inodes +              list inode information instead of block usage + +       -k     like --block-size=1K + +       -l, --local +              limit listing to local file systems + +       --no-sync +              do  not  invoke  sync  before  getting usage info +              (default) + +       -P, --portability +              use the POSIX output format + +       --sync invoke sync before getting usage info + +       -t, --type=TYPE +              limit listing to file systems of type TYPE + +       -T, --print-type +              print file system type + +       -x, --exclude-type=TYPE +              limit listing to file systems not of type TYPE + +       -v     (ignored) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIZE may be (or may be an  integer  optionally  followed +       by)  one  of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M +       1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, and  Paul +       Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for df is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  df  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info df + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +df 5.3.0                 November 2004                    DF(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64b3972 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +DIR(1)                   User Commands                   DIR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       dir - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS +       dir [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       List  information about the FILEs (the current directory +       by default).  Sort entries  alphabetically  if  none  of +       -cftuSUX nor --sort. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -a, --all +              do not ignore entries starting with . + +       -A, --almost-all +              do not list implied . and .. + +       --author +              with -l, print the author of each file + +       -b, --escape +              print octal escapes for nongraphic characters + +       --block-size=SIZE +              use SIZE-byte blocks + +       -B, --ignore-backups +              do not list implied entries ending with ~ + +       -c     with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of  last +              modification of file status information) with -l: +              show ctime and sort by name  otherwise:  sort  by +              ctime + +       -C     list entries by columns + +       --color[=WHEN] +              control whether color is used to distinguish file +              types.  WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto' + +       -d, --directory +              list directory entries instead of  contents,  and +              do not dereference symbolic links + +       -D, --dired +              generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode + +       -f     do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst + +       -F, --classify +              append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries + +       --format=WORD +              across  -x,  commas  -m,  horizontal -x, long -l, +              single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C + +       --full-time +              like -l --time-style=full-iso + +       -g     like -l, but do not list owner + +       -G, --no-group +              like -l, but do not list group + +       -h, --human-readable +              with -l, print sizes  in  human  readable  format +              (e.g., 1K 234M 2G) + +       --si   likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + +       -H, --dereference-command-line +              follow symbolic links listed on the command line + +       --dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir +              follow  each  command  line  symbolic  link  that +              points to a directory + +       --hide=PATTERN +              do not list implied entries matching  shell  PAT- +              TERN (overridden by -a or -A) + +       --indicator-style=WORD  append indicator with style WORD +       to entry names: +              none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p) + +       -i, --inode +              with -l, print the index number of each file + +       -I, --ignore=PATTERN +              do  not  list implied entries matching shell PAT- +              TERN + +       -k     like --block-size=1K + +       -l     use a long listing format + +       -L, --dereference +              when showing  file  information  for  a  symbolic +              link, show information for the file the link ref- +              erences rather than for the link itself + +       -m     fill width with a comma separated list of entries + +       -n, --numeric-uid-gid +              like -l, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs + +       -N, --literal +              print  raw  entry names (don't treat e.g. control +              characters specially) + +       -o     like -l, but do not list group information + +       -p, --file-type +              append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries + +       -q, --hide-control-chars +              print ? instead of non graphic characters + +       --show-control-chars +              show non graphic characters as-is (default unless +              program is `ls' and output is a terminal) + +       -Q, --quote-name +              enclose entry names in double quotes + +       --quoting-style=WORD +              use  quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, +              locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape + +       -r, --reverse +              reverse order while sorting + +       -R, --recursive +              list subdirectories recursively + +       -s, --size +              with -l, print size of each file, in blocks + +       -S     sort by file size + +       --sort=WORD +              extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t,  version +              -v,  status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use +              -u + +       --time=WORD +              with -l, show time as WORD instead  of  modifica- +              tion  time:  atime, access, use, ctime or status; +              use specified time as sort key if --sort=time + +       --time-style=STYLE +              with -l, show times using style STYLE:  full-iso, +              long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT.  FORMAT is inter- +              preted like `date';  if  FORMAT  is  FORMAT1<new- +              line>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to non-recent files +              and FORMAT2 to recent files; if STYLE is prefixed +              with  `posix-',  STYLE  takes effect only outside +              the POSIX locale + +       -t     sort by modification time + +       -T, --tabsize=COLS +              assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8 + +       -u     with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: +              show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort +              by access time + +       -U     do not sort; list entries in directory order + +       -v     sort by version + +       -w, --width=COLS +              assume screen width instead of current value + +       -x     list entries by lines instead of by columns + +       -X     sort alphabetically by entry extension + +       -1     list one file per line + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIZE may be (or may be an  integer  optionally  followed +       by)  one  of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M +       1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +       By default, color is not used to  distinguish  types  of +       files.  That is equivalent to using --color=none.  Using +       the --color option without the optional WHEN argument is +       equivalent  to using --color=always.  With --color=auto, +       color codes are output only if standard output  is  con- +       nected to a terminal (tty). + +       Exit  status is 0 if OK, 1 if minor problems, 2 if seri- +       ous trouble. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for dir is maintained as  a  Tex- +       info  manual.  If the info and dir programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info dir + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dir 5.3.0                December 2004                   DIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dircolors.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dircolors.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab466c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dircolors.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +DIRCOLORS(1)             User Commands             DIRCOLORS(1) + + + + + +NAME +       dircolors - color setup for ls + +SYNOPSIS +       dircolors [OPTION]... [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION +       Output  commands  to set the LS_COLORS environment vari- +       able. + +   Determine format of output: +       -b, --sh, --bourne-shell +              output Bourne shell code to set LS_COLORS + +       -c, --csh, --c-shell +              output C shell code to set LS_COLORS + +       -p, --print-database +              output defaults + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If FILE is specified, read it to determine which  colors +       to  use for which file types and extensions.  Otherwise, +       a precompiled database is used.  For details on the for- +       mat of these files, run `dircolors --print-database'. + +AUTHOR +       Written by H. Peter Anvin. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for dircolors is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and dircolors programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info dircolors + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dircolors 5.3.0          November 2004             DIRCOLORS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dirname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dirname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a0e0a5a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/dirname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +DIRNAME(1)               User Commands               DIRNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME +       dirname - strip non-directory suffix from file name + +SYNOPSIS +       dirname NAME +       dirname OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Print NAME with its trailing /component removed; if NAME +       contains no /'s, output `.' (meaning the current  direc- +       tory). + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for dirname is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and  dirname  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info dirname + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +dirname 5.3.0            November 2004               DIRNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/du.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/du.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ede7f2b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/du.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +DU(1)                    User Commands                    DU(1) + + + + + +NAME +       du - estimate file space usage + +SYNOPSIS +       du [OPTION]... [FILE]... +       du [OPTION]... --files0-from=F + +DESCRIPTION +       Summarize  disk  usage  of  each  FILE,  recursively for +       directories. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -a, --all +              write counts for all files, not just directories + +       --apparent-size +              print  apparent  sizes,  rather  than disk usage; +              although the apparent size is usually smaller, it +              may  be  larger due to holes in (`sparse') files, +              internal fragmentation, indirect blocks, and  the +              like + +       -B, --block-size=SIZE use SIZE-byte blocks + +       -b, --bytes +              equivalent to `--apparent-size --block-size=1' + +       -c, --total +              produce a grand total + +       -D, --dereference-args +              dereference FILEs that are symbolic links + +       --files0-from=F +              summarize  disk  usage of the NUL-terminated file +              names specified in file F + +       -H     like --si, but also evokes a warning;  will  soon +              change  to  be  equivalent  to --dereference-args +              (-D) + +       -h, --human-readable +              print sizes in human readable  format  (e.g.,  1K +              234M 2G) + +       --si   like -h, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + +       -k     like --block-size=1K + +       -l, --count-links +              count sizes many times if hard linked + +       -L, --dereference +              dereference all symbolic links + +       -P, --no-dereference +              don't  follow  any  symbolic  links  (this is the +              default) + +       -0, --null +              end each output line with 0 byte rather than new- +              line + +       -S, --separate-dirs +              do not include size of subdirectories + +       -s, --summarize +              display only a total for each argument + +       -x, --one-file-system +              skip directories on different file systems + +       -X FILE, --exclude-from=FILE +              Exclude files that match any pattern in FILE. + +       --exclude=PATTERN Exclude files that match PATTERN. + +       --max-depth=N +              print  the  total  for a directory (or file, with +              --all) only if it is N or fewer levels below  the +              command line argument;  --max-depth=0 is the same +              as --summarize + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIZE may be (or may be an  integer  optionally  followed +       by)  one  of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M +       1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +PATTERNS +       PATTERN is a shell pattern (not a  regular  expression). +       The  pattern  ?   matches  any  one character, whereas * +       matches any string (composed of zero,  one  or  multiple +       characters).   For  example,  *.o  will  match any files +       whose names end in .o.  Therefore, the command + +              du --exclude='*.o' + +       will skip all files  and  subdirectories  ending  in  .o +       (including the file .o itself). + +AUTHOR +       Written  by  Torbjorn  Granlund,  David  MacKenzie, Paul +       Eggert, and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for du is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  du  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info du + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +du 5.3.0                  January 2005                    DU(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/echo.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/echo.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..472d132 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/echo.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +ECHO(1)                  User Commands                  ECHO(1) + + + + + +NAME +       echo - display a line of text + +SYNOPSIS +       echo [OPTION]... [STRING]... + +DESCRIPTION +       NOTE:  your shell may have its own version of echo which +       will supersede the version described here. Please  refer +       to  your  shell's  documentation  for  details about the +       options it supports. + +       Echo the STRING(s) to standard output. + +       -n     do not output the trailing newline + +       -e     enable interpretation of backslash escapes + +       -E     disable  interpretation  of   backslash   escapes +              (default) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If  -e  is in effect, the following sequences are recog- +       nized: + +       \0NNN  the character whose ASCII code is NNN (octal) + +       \\     backslash + +       \a     alert (BEL) + +       \b     backspace + +       \c     suppress trailing newline + +       \f     form feed + +       \n     new line + +       \r     carriage return + +       \t     horizontal tab + +       \v     vertical tab + +AUTHOR +       Written by FIXME unknown. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for echo is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and echo programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info echo + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +echo 5.3.0               November 2004                  ECHO(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/env.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/env.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c70d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/env.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +ENV(1)                   User Commands                   ENV(1) + + + + + +NAME +       env - run a program in a modified environment + +SYNOPSIS +       env [OPTION]... [-] [NAME=VALUE]... [COMMAND [ARG]...] + +DESCRIPTION +       Set  each  NAME to VALUE in the environment and run COM- +       MAND. + +       -i, --ignore-environment +              start with an empty environment + +       -u, --unset=NAME +              remove variable from the environment + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       A mere - implies -i.  If no COMMAND, print the resulting +       environment. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Mlynarik and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for env is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and env programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info env + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +env 5.3.0                November 2004                   ENV(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expand.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expand.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..721fb19 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expand.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +EXPAND(1)                User Commands                EXPAND(1) + + + + + +NAME +       expand - convert tabs to spaces + +SYNOPSIS +       expand [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Convert tabs in each FILE to spaces, writing to standard +       output.  With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read  standard +       input. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -i, --initial +              do not convert tabs after non blanks + +       -t, --tabs=NUMBER +              have tabs NUMBER characters apart, not 8 + +       -t, --tabs=LIST +              use comma separated list of  explicit  tab  posi- +              tions + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       unexpand(1) + +       The  full  documentation  for  expand is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info  and  expand  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info expand + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +expand 5.3.0             November 2004                EXPAND(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expr.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expr.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71d0e8d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/expr.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +EXPR(1)                  User Commands                  EXPR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       expr - evaluate expressions + +SYNOPSIS +       expr EXPRESSION +       expr OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Print  the  value  of  EXPRESSION to standard output.  A +       blank line below separates increasing precedence groups. +       EXPRESSION may be: + +       ARG1 | ARG2 +              ARG1 if it is neither null nor 0, otherwise ARG2 + +       ARG1 & ARG2 +              ARG1  if neither argument is null or 0, otherwise +              0 + +       ARG1 < ARG2 +              ARG1 is less than ARG2 + +       ARG1 <= ARG2 +              ARG1 is less than or equal to ARG2 + +       ARG1 = ARG2 +              ARG1 is equal to ARG2 + +       ARG1 != ARG2 +              ARG1 is unequal to ARG2 + +       ARG1 >= ARG2 +              ARG1 is greater than or equal to ARG2 + +       ARG1 > ARG2 +              ARG1 is greater than ARG2 + +       ARG1 + ARG2 +              arithmetic sum of ARG1 and ARG2 + +       ARG1 - ARG2 +              arithmetic difference of ARG1 and ARG2 + +       ARG1 * ARG2 +              arithmetic product of ARG1 and ARG2 + +       ARG1 / ARG2 +              arithmetic quotient of ARG1 divided by ARG2 + +       ARG1 % ARG2 +              arithmetic remainder of ARG1 divided by ARG2 + +       STRING : REGEXP +              anchored pattern match of REGEXP in STRING + +       match STRING REGEXP +              same as STRING : REGEXP + +       substr STRING POS LENGTH +              substring of STRING, POS counted from 1 + +       index STRING CHARS +              index in STRING where any CHARS is found, or 0 + +       length STRING +              length of STRING + +       + TOKEN +              interpret TOKEN as a string, even if it is a + +              keyword like `match' or an operator like `/' + +       ( EXPRESSION ) +              value of EXPRESSION + +       Beware that many operators need to be escaped or  quoted +       for shells.  Comparisons are arithmetic if both ARGs are +       numbers, else lexicographical.  Pattern  matches  return +       the  string matched between \( and \) or null; if \( and +       \) are not used, they return the  number  of  characters +       matched or 0. + +       Exit  status is 0 if EXPRESSION is neither null nor 0, 1 +       if EXPRESSION is null or 0, 2 if EXPRESSION is syntacti- +       cally invalid, and 3 if an error occurred. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Mike Parker. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for expr is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and expr programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info expr + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +expr 5.3.0               November 2004                  EXPR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/factor.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/factor.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93cc432 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/factor.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +FACTOR(1)                User Commands                FACTOR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       factor - factor numbers + +SYNOPSIS +       factor [NUMBER]... +       factor OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Print the prime factors of each NUMBER. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Print  the  prime  factors of all specified integer NUM- +       BERs. +              If no arguments + +              are  specified on the command line, they are read +              from standard input. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Paul Rubin. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for factor  is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the  info and factor programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info factor + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +factor 5.3.0             December 2004                FACTOR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/false.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/false.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f12187 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/false.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +FALSE(1)                 User Commands                 FALSE(1) + + + + + +NAME +       false - do nothing, unsuccessfully + +SYNOPSIS +       false [ignored command line arguments] +       false OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Exit with a status code indicating failure. + +       These option names may not be abbreviated. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for false is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and false programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info false + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +false 5.3.0              November 2004                 FALSE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fmt.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fmt.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9be5e44 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fmt.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +FMT(1)                   User Commands                   FMT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       fmt - simple optimal text formatter + +SYNOPSIS +       fmt [-DIGITS] [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Reformat each paragraph in the FILE(s), writing to stan- +       dard output.  If no FILE or if FILE is `-',  read  stan- +       dard input. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -c, --crown-margin +              preserve indentation of first two lines + +       -p, --prefix=STRING +              reformat only lines beginning with STRING,  reat- +              taching the prefix to reformatted lines + +       -s, --split-only +              split long lines, but do not refill + +       -t, --tagged-paragraph +              indentation of first line different from second + +       -u, --uniform-spacing +              one space between words, two after sentences + +       -w, --width=WIDTH +              maximum line width (default of 75 columns) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Ross Paterson. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for fmt is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and fmt programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info fmt + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +fmt 5.3.0                November 2004                   FMT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fold.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fold.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17fc668 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/fold.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +FOLD(1)                  User Commands                  FOLD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       fold - wrap each input line to fit in specified width + +SYNOPSIS +       fold [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Wrap  input  lines  in  each  FILE  (standard  input  by +       default), writing to standard output. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -b, --bytes +              count bytes rather than columns + +       -s, --spaces +              break at spaces + +       -w, --width=WIDTH +              use WIDTH columns instead of 80 + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for fold is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and fold programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info fold + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +fold 5.3.0               November 2004                  FOLD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/gawk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/gawk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a431e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/gawk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1972 @@ +GAWK(1)                        Utility Commands                        GAWK(1) + + + +NAME +       gawk - pattern scanning and processing language + +SYNOPSIS +       gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ -- +       ] file ... +       gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ]  program-text +       file ... + +       pgawk  [  POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ +       -- ] file ... +       pgawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text +       file ... + +DESCRIPTION +       Gawk is the GNU Project's implementation of the AWK pro- +       gramming language.  It conforms to the definition of the +       language  in the POSIX 1003.1 Standard.  This version in +       turn is based on the description in The AWK  Programming +       Language,  by  Aho,  Kernighan, and Weinberger, with the +       additional features found in the System V Release 4 ver- +       sion  of  UNIX awk.  Gawk also provides more recent Bell +       Laboratories awk extensions, and a  number  of  GNU-spe- +       cific extensions. + +       Pgawk is the profiling version of gawk.  It is identical +       in every way to gawk,  except  that  programs  run  more +       slowly,  and it automatically produces an execution pro- +       file in the file awkprof.out when done.  See the  --pro- +       file option, below. + +       The command line consists of options to gawk itself, the +       AWK program text (if not supplied via the -f  or  --file +       options),  and  values  to be made available in the ARGC +       and ARGV pre-defined AWK variables. + +OPTION FORMAT +       Gawk options may be either traditional POSIX one  letter +       options, or GNU-style long options.  POSIX options start +       with a single "-", while long options start  with  "--". +       Long options are provided for both GNU-specific features +       and for POSIX-mandated features. + +       Following the POSIX standard, gawk-specific options  are +       supplied  via  arguments  to the -W option.  Multiple -W +       options may be supplied Each -W option has a correspond- +       ing  long  option, as detailed below.  Arguments to long +       options are either joined with the option by an =  sign, +       with  no  intervening spaces, or they may be provided in +       the next command line argument.   Long  options  may  be +       abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation remains unique. + +OPTIONS +       Gawk accepts the following options, listed by frequency. + +       -F fs +       --field-separator fs +              Use  fs  for the input field separator (the value +              of the FS predefined variable). + +       -v var=val +       --assign var=val +              Assign the value val to the variable var,  before +              execution  of  the program begins.  Such variable +              values are available to the BEGIN block of an AWK +              program. + +       -f program-file +       --file program-file +              Read  the  AWK  program source from the file pro- +              gram-file, instead of from the first command line +              argument.  Multiple -f (or --file) options may be +              used. + +       -mf NNN +       -mr NNN +              Set various memory limits to the value NNN.   The +              f flag sets the maximum number of fields, and the +              r flag sets the maximum record size.   These  two +              flags  and the -m option are from an earlier ver- +              sion of the Bell Laboratories research version of +              UNIX  awk.   They are ignored by gawk, since gawk +              has no pre-defined limits. + +       -W compat +       -W traditional +       --compat +       --traditional +              Run  in  compatibility  mode.   In  compatibility +              mode,  gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none +              of the GNU-specific  extensions  are  recognized. +              The  use  of  --traditional is preferred over the +              other forms of this option.  See GNU  EXTENSIONS, +              below, for more information. + +       -W copyleft +       -W copyright +       --copyleft +       --copyright +              Print  the  short  version  of  the GNU copyright +              information message on the  standard  output  and +              exit successfully. + +       -W dump-variables[=file] +       --dump-variables[=file] +              Print  a  sorted  list of global variables, their +              types and final values to file.  If  no  file  is +              provided,  gawk  uses a file named awkvars.out in +              the current directory. +              Having a list of all the global  variables  is  a +              good way to look for typographical errors in your +              programs.  You would also use this option if  you +              have a large program with a lot of functions, and +              you want to be sure  that  your  functions  don't +              inadvertently use global variables that you meant +              to be local.  (This is a particularly  easy  mis- +              take  to  make with simple variable names like i, +              j, and so on.) + +       -W exec file +       --exec file +              Similar to -f, however, this  is  option  is  the +              last  one processed.  This should be used with #! +              scripts, particularly for  CGI  applications,  to +              avoid  passing  in  options or source code (!) on +              the command line from a URL.   This  option  dis- +              ables command-line variable assignments. + +       -W gen-po +       --gen-po +              Scan  and  parse  the AWK program, and generate a +              GNU .po  format  file  on  standard  output  with +              entries  for  all localizable strings in the pro- +              gram.  The program itself is not  executed.   See +              the GNU gettext distribution for more information +              on .po files. + +       -W help +       -W usage +       --help +       --usage +              Print a relatively short summary of the available +              options  on  the  standard  output.  (Per the GNU +              Coding Standards, these options cause an  immedi- +              ate, successful exit.) + +       -W lint[=value] +       --lint[=value] +              Provide  warnings about constructs that are dubi- +              ous or non-portable to other AWK implementations. +              With an optional argument of fatal, lint warnings +              become fatal errors.  This may  be  drastic,  but +              its  use will certainly encourage the development +              of cleaner AWK programs.  With an optional  argu- +              ment  of invalid, only warnings about things that +              are actually invalid are  issued.  (This  is  not +              fully implemented yet.) + +       -W lint-old +       --lint-old +              Provide  warnings  about  constructs that are not +              portable to the original version of Unix awk. + +       -W non-decimal-data +       --non-decimal-data +              Recognize octal and hexadecimal values  in  input +              data.  Use this option with great caution! + +       -W posix +       --posix +              This  turns  on compatibility mode, with the fol- +              lowing additional restrictions: + +              · \x escape sequences are not recognized. + +              · Only space and tab act as field separators when +                FS  is set to a single space, newline does not. + +              · You cannot continue lines after ?  and :. + +              · The synonym func for the  keyword  function  is +                not recognized. + +              · The  operators  **  and  **=  cannot be used in +                place of ^ and ^=. + +              · The fflush() function is not available. + +       -W profile[=prof_file] +       --profile[=prof_file] +              Send profiling data to prof_file.  The default is +              awkprof.out.   When run with gawk, the profile is +              just a "pretty printed" version of  the  program. +              When  run with pgawk, the profile contains execu- +              tion counts of each statement in the  program  in +              the left margin and function call counts for each +              user-defined function. + +       -W re-interval +       --re-interval +              Enable the use of interval expressions in regular +              expression  matching  (see  Regular  Expressions, +              below).  Interval expressions were not tradition- +              ally  available  in  the AWK language.  The POSIX +              standard added them, to make awk and  egrep  con- +              sistent  with  each other.  However, their use is +              likely to break old AWK programs,  so  gawk  only +              provides  them  if  they  are requested with this +              option, or when --posix is specified. + +       -W source program-text +       --source program-text +              Use program-text  as  AWK  program  source  code. +              This   option  allows  the  easy  intermixing  of +              library functions (used via  the  -f  and  --file +              options)  with source code entered on the command +              line.  It is intended  primarily  for  medium  to +              large AWK programs used in shell scripts. + +       -W use-lc-numeric +       --use-lc-numeric +              This  forces  gawk  to  use  the locale's decimal +              point  character   when   parsing   input   data. +              Although  the POSIX standard requires this behav- +              ior, and gawk does so when --posix is in  effect, +              the default is to follow traditional behavior and +              use a  period  as  the  decimal  point,  even  in +              locales where the period is not the decimal point +              character.  This  option  overrides  the  default +              behavior,  without  the full draconian strictness +              of the --posix option. + +       -W version +       --version +              Print version  information  for  this  particular +              copy  of  gawk  on  the standard output.  This is +              useful mainly for knowing if the current copy  of +              gawk on your system is up to date with respect to +              whatever the Free  Software  Foundation  is  dis- +              tributing.   This  is  also useful when reporting +              bugs.   (Per  the  GNU  Coding  Standards,  these +              options cause an immediate, successful exit.) + +       --     Signal  the  end  of  options.  This is useful to +              allow further arguments to the AWK program itself +              to  start  with a "-".  This provides consistency +              with the argument parsing convention used by most +              other POSIX programs. +       In  compatibility mode, any other options are flagged as +       invalid, but are otherwise ignored.   In  normal  opera- +       tion, as long as program text has been supplied, unknown +       options are passed on to the AWK  program  in  the  ARGV +       array  for  processing.  This is particularly useful for +       running AWK programs via the "#!" executable interpreter +       mechanism. +AWK PROGRAM EXECUTION +       An  AWK program consists of a sequence of pattern-action +       statements and optional function definitions. +              pattern   { action statements } +              function name(parameter list) { statements } +       Gawk first reads the program source  from  the  program- +       file(s)  if  specified,  from  arguments to --source, or +       from the first non-option argument on the command  line. +       The  -f  and --source options may be used multiple times +       on the command line.  Gawk reads the program text as  if +       all  the program-files and command line source texts had +       been concatenated together.  This is useful for building +       libraries  of  AWK  functions, without having to include +       them in each new AWK program that uses  them.   It  also +       provides  the ability to mix library functions with com- +       mand line programs. +       The environment variable AWKPATH specifies a search path +       to  use  when  finding  source  files  named with the -f +       option.  If this variable does not  exist,  the  default +       path is ".:/usr/local/share/awk".  (The actual directory +       may  vary,  depending  upon  how  gawk  was  built   and +       installed.)   If a file name given to the -f option con- +       tains a "/" character, no path search is performed. +       Gawk executes  AWK  programs  in  the  following  order. +       First,  all  variable  assignments  specified via the -v +       option are performed.  Next, gawk compiles  the  program +       into  an internal form.  Then, gawk executes the code in +       the BEGIN block(s) (if any), and then proceeds  to  read +       each  file  named  in  the  ARGV array.  If there are no +       files named on the command line, gawk reads the standard +       input. +       If  a  filename on the command line has the form var=val +       it is treated as a variable  assignment.   The  variable +       var will be assigned the value val.  (This happens after +       any BEGIN block(s) have been run.)  Command  line  vari- +       able assignment is most useful for dynamically assigning +       values to the variables AWK uses to control how input is +       broken  into  fields and records.  It is also useful for +       controlling state if multiple passes are needed  over  a +       single data file. +       If  the  value  of a particular element of ARGV is empty +       (""), gawk skips over it. +       For each record in the input, gawk tests to  see  if  it +       matches  any  pattern in the AWK program.  For each pat- +       tern that the record matches, the associated  action  is +       executed.   The  patterns  are  tested in the order they +       occur in the program. +       Finally, after all the input is exhausted, gawk executes +       the code in the END block(s) (if any). +VARIABLES, RECORDS AND FIELDS +       AWK variables are dynamic; they come into existence when +       they are first used.  Their values are either  floating- +       point  numbers  or  strings, or both, depending upon how +       they are used.  AWK also  has  one  dimensional  arrays; +       arrays  with multiple dimensions may be simulated.  Sev- +       eral pre-defined variables are set as  a  program  runs; +       these are described as needed and summarized below. +   Records +       Normally,  records  are separated by newline characters. +       You can control how records are separated  by  assigning +       values to the built-in variable RS.  If RS is any single +       character, that character separates records.  Otherwise, +       RS  is  a  regular  expression.   Text in the input that +       matches this regular expression  separates  the  record. +       However, in compatibility mode, only the first character +       of its string value is used for separating records.   If +       RS is set to the null string, then records are separated +       by blank lines.  When RS is set to the null string,  the +       newline  character  always acts as a field separator, in +       addition to whatever value FS may have. +   Fields +       As each input record is read,  gawk  splits  the  record +       into  fields,  using the value of the FS variable as the +       field separator.  If FS is a  single  character,  fields +       are  separated  by  that  character.   If FS is the null +       string, then each individual character becomes  a  sepa- +       rate field.  Otherwise, FS is expected to be a full reg- +       ular expression.  In the special case that FS is a  sin- +       gle space, fields are separated by runs of spaces and/or +       tabs and/or newlines.  (But see the section  POSIX  COM- +       PATIBILITY,  below).  NOTE: The value of IGNORECASE (see +       below) also affects how fields are split when  FS  is  a +       regular  expression,  and how records are separated when +       RS is a regular expression. +       If the FIELDWIDTHS variable is set to a space  separated +       list  of  numbers,  each field is expected to have fixed +       width, and gawk splits up the record using the specified +       widths.   The  value  of FS is ignored.  Assigning a new +       value to  FS  overrides  the  use  of  FIELDWIDTHS,  and +       restores the default behavior. +       Each  field in the input record may be referenced by its +       position, $1, $2, and so on.  $0 is  the  whole  record. +       Fields need not be referenced by constants: +              n = 5 +              print $n +       prints the fifth field in the input record. +       The  variable NF is set to the total number of fields in +       the input record. +       References to non-existent  fields  (i.e.  fields  after +       $NF)  produce  the null-string.  However, assigning to a +       non-existent field (e.g., $(NF+2)  =  5)  increases  the +       value  of  NF,  creates  any intervening fields with the +       null string as their value, and causes the value  of  $0 +       to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by the +       value of OFS.  References to  negative  numbered  fields +       cause  a fatal error.  Decrementing NF causes the values +       of fields past the new value to be lost, and  the  value +       of  $0 to be recomputed, with the fields being separated +       by the value of OFS. +       Assigning a value to an existing field causes the  whole +       record  to be rebuilt when $0 is referenced.  Similarly, +       assigning a value to $0 causes the record to be resplit, +       creating new values for the fields. +   Built-in Variables +       Gawk's built-in variables are: +       ARGC        The  number  of command line arguments (does +                   not include options to gawk, or the  program +                   source). +       ARGIND      The  index in ARGV of the current file being +                   processed. +       ARGV        Array of command line arguments.  The  array +                   is  indexed from 0 to ARGC - 1.  Dynamically +                   changing the contents of  ARGV  can  control +                   the files used for data. +       BINMODE     On   non-POSIX  systems,  specifies  use  of +                   "binary" mode for  all  file  I/O.   Numeric +                   values  of  1,  2,  or 3, specify that input +                   files, output files, or all  files,  respec- +                   tively,  should use binary I/O.  String val- +                   ues of "r", or "w" specify that input files, +                   or  output  files,  respectively, should use +                   binary I/O.  String values of "rw"  or  "wr" +                   specify  that  all  files  should use binary +                   I/O.  Any other string value is  treated  as +                   "rw", but generates a warning message. +       CONVFMT     The  conversion  format for numbers, "%.6g", +                   by default. +       ENVIRON     An array containing the values of  the  cur- +                   rent  environment.   The array is indexed by +                   the  environment  variables,  each   element +                   being the value of that variable (e.g., ENV- +                   IRON["HOME"] might be /home/arnold).  Chang- +                   ing  this array does not affect the environ- +                   ment seen by programs which gawk spawns  via +                   redirection or the system() function. +       ERRNO       If  a  system  error  occurs  either doing a +                   redirection for getline, during a  read  for +                   getline,  or  during  a  close(), then ERRNO +                   will contain a string describing the  error. +                   The  value is subject to translation in non- +                   English locales. +       FIELDWIDTHS A white-space separated list of fieldwidths. +                   When  set, gawk parses the input into fields +                   of fixed width, instead of using  the  value +                   of the FS variable as the field separator. +       FILENAME    The  name  of the current input file.  If no +                   files are specified on the command line, the +                   value of FILENAME is "-".  However, FILENAME +                   is undefined inside the BEGIN block  (unless +                   set by getline). +       FNR         The input record number in the current input +                   file. +       FS          The  input  field  separator,  a  space   by +                   default.  See Fields, above. +       IGNORECASE  Controls the case-sensitivity of all regular +                   expression  and   string   operations.    If +                   IGNORECASE has a non-zero value, then string +                   comparisons and pattern matching  in  rules, +                   field  splitting  with FS, record separating +                   with RS, regular expression matching with  ~ +                   and  !~,  and the gensub(), gsub(), index(), +                   match(), split(), and sub()  built-in  func- +                   tions  all  ignore  case  when doing regular +                   expression  operations.   NOTE:  Array  sub- +                   scripting  is  not  affected.   However, the +                   asort() and asorti() functions are affected. +                   Thus,  if  IGNORECASE  is not equal to zero, +                   /aB/ matches all of the strings "ab",  "aB", +                   "Ab",  and "AB".  As with all AWK variables, +                   the initial value of IGNORECASE is zero,  so +                   all regular expression and string operations +                   are normally  case-sensitive.   Under  Unix, +                   the full ISO 8859-1 Latin-1 character set is +                   used when ignoring case.  As of gawk  3.1.4, +                   the  case  equivalencies  are  fully locale- +                   aware, based on the C  <ctype.h>  facilities +                   such as isalpha(), and toupper(). +       LINT        Provides   dynamic  control  of  the  --lint +                   option from within  an  AWK  program.   When +                   true, gawk prints lint warnings. When false, +                   it does not.  When assigned the string value +                   "fatal",  lint warnings become fatal errors, +                   exactly like --lint=fatal.  Any  other  true +                   value just prints warnings. +       NF          The  number  of  fields in the current input +                   record. +       NR          The total number of input  records  seen  so +                   far. +       OFMT        The  output  format  for numbers, "%.6g", by +                   default. +       OFS         The  output  field  separator,  a  space  by +                   default. +       ORS         The  output  record  separator, by default a +                   newline. +       PROCINFO    The elements of this array provide access to +                   information  about  the running AWK program. +                   On some systems, there may  be  elements  in +                   the  array,  "group1"  through  "groupn" for +                   some n, which is the number of supplementary +                   groups  that  the  process  has.  Use the in +                   operator to test for  these  elements.   The +                   following  elements  are  guaranteed  to  be +                   available: +                   PROCINFO["egid"]   the value  of  the  gete- +                                      gid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["euid"]   the    value    of    the +                                      geteuid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["FS"]     "FS" if  field  splitting +                                      with  FS is in effect, or +                                      "FIELDWIDTHS"  if   field +                                      splitting   with   FIELD- +                                      WIDTHS is in effect. +                   PROCINFO["gid"]    the  value  of  the  get- +                                      gid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["pgrpid"] the  process  group ID of +                                      the current process. +                   PROCINFO["pid"]    the  process  ID  of  the +                                      current process. +                   PROCINFO["ppid"]   the  parent process ID of +                                      the current process. +                   PROCINFO["uid"]    the    value    of    the +                                      getuid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["version"] +                                      The   version   of  gawk. +                                      This  is  available  from +                                      version  3.1.4 and later. +       RS          The input record  separator,  by  default  a +                   newline. +       RT          The  record terminator.  Gawk sets RT to the +                   input text that  matched  the  character  or +                   regular expression specified by RS. +       RSTART      The  index of the first character matched by +                   match(); 0 if no match.  (This implies  that +                   character indices start at one.) +       RLENGTH     The length of the string matched by match(); +                   -1 if no match. +       SUBSEP      The character used to separate multiple sub- +                   scripts   in   array  elements,  by  default +                   "\034". +       TEXTDOMAIN  The text domain of the AWK program; used  to +                   find the localized translations for the pro- +                   gram's strings. +   Arrays +       Arrays are subscripted with an expression between square +       brackets  ([ and ]).  If the expression is an expression +       list (expr, expr ...)  then the  array  subscript  is  a +       string  consisting  of the concatenation of the (string) +       value of each expression, separated by the value of  the +       SUBSEP variable.  This facility is used to simulate mul- +       tiply dimensioned arrays.  For example: +              i = "A"; j = "B"; k = "C" +              x[i, j, k] = "hello, world\n" +       assigns the string "hello, world\n" to  the  element  of +       the   array   x   which   is   indexed   by  the  string +       "A\034B\034C".  All arrays in AWK are associative,  i.e. +       indexed by string values. +       The  special operator in may be used to test if an array +       has an index consisting of a particular value. +              if (val in array) +                   print array[val] +       If the array has multiple  subscripts,  use  (i,  j)  in +       array. +       The in construct may also be used in a for loop to iter- +       ate over all the elements of an array. +       An element may be deleted from an array using the delete +       statement.   The  delete  statement  may also be used to +       delete the entire contents of an array, just by specify- +       ing the array name without a subscript. +   Variable Typing And Conversion +       Variables and fields may be (floating point) numbers, or +       strings, or both.  How the value of a variable is inter- +       preted  depends  upon its context.  If used in a numeric +       expression, it will be treated as a number; if used as a +       string it will be treated as a string. +       To  force a variable to be treated as a number, add 0 to +       it; to force it to be treated as a  string,  concatenate +       it with the null string. +       When a string must be converted to a number, the conver- +       sion is accomplished using strtod(3).  A number is  con- +       verted  to  a  string by using the value of CONVFMT as a +       format string for sprintf(3), with the numeric value  of +       the  variable as the argument.  However, even though all +       numbers in AWK are floating-point, integral  values  are +       always converted as integers.  Thus, given +              CONVFMT = "%2.2f" +              a = 12 +              b = a "" +       the  variable  b  has  a  string  value  of "12" and not +       "12.00". +       When operating in POSIX mode (such as with  the  --posix +       command  line  option),  beware that locale settings may +       interfere with the way decimal numbers are treated:  the +       decimal separator of the numbers you are feeding to gawk +       must conform to what your locale would expect, be  it  a +       comma (,) or a period (.). +       Gawk  performs  comparisons as follows: If two variables +       are numeric, they  are  compared  numerically.   If  one +       value  is  numeric and the other has a string value that +       is a "numeric string," then comparisons  are  also  done +       numerically.   Otherwise, the numeric value is converted +       to a string and a string comparison is  performed.   Two +       strings are compared, of course, as strings. +       Note  that  string  constants,  such  as  "57",  are not +       numeric strings, they are string constants.  The idea of +       "numeric  string" only applies to fields, getline input, +       FILENAME, ARGV elements, ENVIRON elements and  the  ele- +       ments  of  an  array created by split() that are numeric +       strings.  The basic idea is that user  input,  and  only +       user  input,  that looks numeric, should be treated that +       way. +       Uninitialized variables have the numeric value 0 and the +       string value "" (the null, or empty, string). +   Octal and Hexadecimal Constants +       Starting  with version 3.1 of gawk , you may use C-style +       octal and hexadecimal  constants  in  your  AWK  program +       source  code.  For example, the octal value 011 is equal +       to decimal 9, and the hexadecimal value 0x11 is equal to +       decimal 17. +   String Constants +       String  constants  in  AWK  are  sequences of characters +       enclosed between double  quotes  (").   Within  strings, +       certain escape sequences are recognized, as in C.  These +       are: +       \\   A literal backslash. +       \a   The "alert" character; usually the ASCII BEL  char- +            acter. +       \b   backspace. +       \f   form-feed. +       \n   newline. +       \r   carriage return. +       \t   horizontal tab. +       \v   vertical tab. +       \xhex digits +            The character represented by the string of hexadec- +            imal digits following the \x.  As in  ANSI  C,  all +            following hexadecimal digits are considered part of +            the escape sequence.  (This feature should tell  us +            something  about  language  design  by  committee.) +            E.g., "\x1B" is the ASCII ESC (escape) character. +       \ddd The character represented by the 1-, 2-, or 3-digit +            sequence  of  octal  digits.   E.g.,  "\033" is the +            ASCII ESC (escape) character. +       \c   The literal character c. +       The escape sequences may also be  used  inside  constant +       regular   expressions   (e.g.,  /[ \t\f\n\r\v]/  matches +       whitespace characters). +       In compatibility mode,  the  characters  represented  by +       octal  and hexadecimal escape sequences are treated lit- +       erally when used in regular expression constants.  Thus, +       /a\52b/ is equivalent to /a\*b/. +PATTERNS AND ACTIONS +       AWK  is  a  line-oriented  language.   The pattern comes +       first, and  then  the  action.   Action  statements  are +       enclosed in { and }.  Either the pattern may be missing, +       or the action may be missing, but, of course, not  both. +       If  the  pattern  is missing, the action is executed for +       every single record  of  input.   A  missing  action  is +       equivalent to +              { print } +       which prints the entire record. +       Comments  begin  with  the  "#"  character, and continue +       until the end of the line.  Blank lines may be  used  to +       separate  statements.  Normally, a statement ends with a +       newline, however, this is not the case for lines  ending +       in  a  ",",  {,  ?, :, &&, or ||.  Lines ending in do or +       else also have their statements automatically  continued +       on  the  following  line.  In other cases, a line can be +       continued by ending it with a "\",  in  which  case  the +       newline will be ignored. +       Multiple statements may be put on one line by separating +       them with a ";".  This applies to  both  the  statements +       within  the  action  part  of a pattern-action pair (the +       usual case), and to the pattern-action statements  them- +       selves. +   Patterns +       AWK patterns may be one of the following: +              BEGIN +              END +              /regular expression/ +              relational expression +              pattern && pattern +              pattern || pattern +              pattern ? pattern : pattern +              (pattern) +              ! pattern +              pattern1, pattern2 +       BEGIN  and  END  are two special kinds of patterns which +       are not tested against the input.  The action  parts  of +       all  BEGIN  patterns are merged as if all the statements +       had been written in a single BEGIN block.  They are exe- +       cuted  before  any of the input is read.  Similarly, all +       the END blocks are merged, and  executed  when  all  the +       input  is  exhausted  (or when an exit statement is exe- +       cuted).  BEGIN and END patterns cannot be combined  with +       other  patterns  in  pattern expressions.  BEGIN and END +       patterns cannot have missing action parts. +       For /regular expression/ patterns, the associated state- +       ment  is executed for each input record that matches the +       regular expression.  Regular expressions are the same as +       those in egrep(1), and are summarized below. +       A  relational  expression  may  use any of the operators +       defined below in the section on actions.   These  gener- +       ally  test  whether certain fields match certain regular +       expressions. +       The &&, ||, and !  operators are  logical  AND,  logical +       OR,  and  logical  NOT,  respectively, as in C.  They do +       short-circuit evaluation, also as in C, and are used for +       combining  more  primitive  pattern  expressions.  As in +       most languages, parentheses may be used  to  change  the +       order of evaluation. +       The  ?: operator is like the same operator in C.  If the +       first pattern is true then the pattern used for  testing +       is  the second pattern, otherwise it is the third.  Only +       one of the second and third patterns is evaluated. +       The pattern1, pattern2 form of an expression is called a +       range  pattern.   It  matches all input records starting +       with a record  that  matches  pattern1,  and  continuing +       until  a  record  that  matches pattern2, inclusive.  It +       does not combine with any other sort of pattern  expres- +       sion. +   Regular Expressions +       Regular  expressions  are  the  extended  kind  found in +       egrep.  They are composed of characters as follows: +       c          matches the non-metacharacter c. +       \c         matches the literal character c. +       .          matches any character including newline. +       ^          matches the beginning of a string. +       $          matches the end of a string. +       [abc...]   character list, matches any of the characters +                  abc.... +       [^abc...]  negated character list, matches any character +                  except abc.... +       r1|r2      alternation: matches either r1 or r2. +       r1r2       concatenation: matches r1, and then r2. +       r+         matches one or more r's. +       r*         matches zero or more r's. +       r?         matches zero or one r's. +       (r)        grouping: matches r. +       r{n} +       r{n,} +       r{n,m}     One or two numbers inside  braces  denote  an +                  interval  expression.  If there is one number +                  in the braces, the preceding regular  expres- +                  sion r is repeated n times.  If there are two +                  numbers separated by a comma, r is repeated n +                  to  m times.  If there is one number followed +                  by a comma, then r is  repeated  at  least  n +                  times. +                  Interval  expressions  are  only available if +                  either --posix or --re-interval is  specified +                  on the command line. + +       \y         matches the empty string at either the begin- +                  ning or the end of a word. + +       \B         matches the empty string within a word. + +       \<         matches the empty string at the beginning  of +                  a word. + +       \>         matches  the  empty  string  at  the end of a +                  word. + +       \w         matches any word-constituent character  (let- +                  ter, digit, or underscore). + +       \W         matches  any  character that is not word-con- +                  stituent. + +       \`         matches the empty string at the beginning  of +                  a buffer (string). + +       \'         matches  the  empty  string  at  the end of a +                  buffer. + +       The escape sequences that are valid in string  constants +       (see below) are also valid in regular expressions. + +       Character  classes are a feature introduced in the POSIX +       standard.  A character class is a special  notation  for +       describing  lists  of  characters  that  have a specific +       attribute, but where the  actual  characters  themselves +       can  vary  from country to country and/or from character +       set to character set.  For example, the notion  of  what +       is  an  alphabetic  character  differs in the USA and in +       France. + +       A character class is only valid in a regular  expression +       inside  the  brackets  of  a  character list.  Character +       classes consist of [:, a keyword denoting the class, and +       :].  The character classes defined by the POSIX standard +       are: + +       [:alnum:]  Alphanumeric characters. + +       [:alpha:]  Alphabetic characters. + +       [:blank:]  Space or tab characters. + +       [:cntrl:]  Control characters. + +       [:digit:]  Numeric characters. + +       [:graph:]  Characters that are both printable and  visi- +                  ble.  (A space is printable, but not visible, +                  while an a is both.) + +       [:lower:]  Lower-case alphabetic characters. + +       [:print:]  Printable characters (characters that are not +                  control characters.) + +       [:punct:]  Punctuation  characters  (characters that are +                  not letter, digits,  control  characters,  or +                  space characters). + +       [:space:]  Space  characters  (such  as  space, tab, and +                  formfeed, to name a few). + +       [:upper:]  Upper-case alphabetic characters. + +       [:xdigit:] Characters that are hexadecimal digits. + +       For  example,  before  the  POSIX  standard,  to   match +       alphanumeric  characters,  you  would  have had to write +       /[A-Za-z0-9]/.  If your character set had  other  alpha- +       betic  characters  in it, this would not match them, and +       if your character set collated differently  from  ASCII, +       this might not even match the ASCII alphanumeric charac- +       ters.  With the POSIX character classes, you  can  write +       /[[:alnum:]]/,  and  this  matches  the  alphabetic  and +       numeric characters in your character set, no matter what +       it is. + +       Two additional special sequences can appear in character +       lists.  These apply to non-ASCII character  sets,  which +       can have single symbols (called collating elements) that +       are represented with more than one character, as well as +       several characters that are equivalent for collating, or +       sorting, purposes.  (E.g., in French, a plain "e" and  a +       grave-accented "`" are equivalent.) + +       Collating Symbols +              A collating symbol is a multi-character collating +              element enclosed in [.  and .].  For example,  if +              ch  is  a  collating element, then [[.ch.]]  is a +              regular expression that  matches  this  collating +              element,  while [ch] is a regular expression that +              matches either c or h. + +       Equivalence Classes +              An equivalence class is  a  locale-specific  name +              for  a  list  of  characters that are equivalent. +              The name is enclosed in [= and =].  For  example, +              the name e might be used to represent all of "e," +              "´," and "`."  In this case, [[=e=]] is a regular +              expression that matches any of e, ´, or `. + +       These features are very valuable in non-English speaking +       locales.  The library functions that gawk uses for regu- +       lar  expression  matching currently only recognize POSIX +       character classes; they do not recognize collating  sym- +       bols or equivalence classes. + +       The  \y,  \B,  \<,  \>, \w, \W, \`, and \' operators are +       specific to gawk; they are extensions based  on  facili- +       ties in the GNU regular expression libraries. + +       The various command line options control how gawk inter- +       prets characters in regular expressions. + +       No options +              In the default case, gawk provide all the facili- +              ties  of  POSIX  regular  expressions and the GNU +              regular  expression  operators  described  above. +              However,  interval expressions are not supported. + +       --posix +              Only POSIX regular expressions are supported, the +              GNU operators are not special.  (E.g., \w matches +              a literal w).  Interval expressions are  allowed. + +       --traditional +              Traditional  Unix  awk  regular  expressions  are +              matched.  The  GNU  operators  are  not  special, +              interval  expressions are not available, and nei- +              ther are the POSIX character classes ([[:alnum:]] +              and  so  on).   Characters described by octal and +              hexadecimal escape sequences are  treated  liter- +              ally,  even  if they represent regular expression +              metacharacters. + +       --re-interval +              Allow interval  expressions  in  regular  expres- +              sions, even if --traditional has been provided. + +   Actions +       Action  statements  are  enclosed  in  braces,  { and }. +       Action statements consist of the usual assignment,  con- +       ditional,  and  looping  statements  found  in most lan- +       guages.   The   operators,   control   statements,   and +       input/output  statements  available  are patterned after +       those in C. + +   Operators +       The operators in AWK, in order of decreasing precedence, +       are + + +       (...)       Grouping + +       $           Field reference. + +       ++ --       Increment  and  decrement,  both  prefix and +                   postfix. + +       ^           Exponentiation (** may also be used, and **= +                   for the assignment operator). + +       + - !       Unary  plus,  unary minus, and logical nega- +                   tion. + +       * / %       Multiplication, division, and modulus. + +       + -         Addition and subtraction. + +       space       String concatenation. + +       | |&        Piped I/O for getline, print, and printf. + +       < > +       <= >= +       != ==       The regular relational operators. + +       ~ !~        Regular  expression  match,  negated  match. +                   NOTE:  Do not use a constant regular expres- +                   sion (/foo/) on the left-hand side of a ~ or +                   !~.   Only  use  one on the right-hand side. +                   The expression /foo/  ~  exp  has  the  same +                   meaning  as  (($0  ~ /foo/) ~ exp).  This is +                   usually not what was intended. + +       in          Array membership. + +       &&          Logical AND. + +       ||          Logical OR. + +       ?:          The C conditional expression.  This has  the +                   form  expr1  ?  expr2  : expr3.  If expr1 is +                   true, the value of the expression is  expr2, +                   otherwise  it  is  expr3.  Only one of expr2 +                   and expr3 is evaluated. + +       = += -= +       *= /= %= ^= Assignment.  Both absolute assignment (var = +                   value)  and  operator-assignment  (the other +                   forms) are supported. + +   Control Statements +       The control statements are as follows: + +              if (condition) statement [ else statement ] +              while (condition) statement +              do statement while (condition) +              for (expr1; expr2; expr3) statement +              for (var in array) statement +              break +              continue +              delete array[index] +              delete array +              exit [ expression ] +              { statements } + +   I/O Statements +       The input/output statements are as follows: + + +       close(file [, how])   Close file,  pipe  or  co-process. +                             The  optional  how  should only be +                             used when closing  one  end  of  a +                             two-way  pipe to a co-process.  It +                             must be  a  string  value,  either +                             "to" or "from". + +       getline               Set $0 from next input record; set +                             NF, NR, FNR. + +       getline <file         Set $0 from next record  of  file; +                             set NF. + +       getline var           Set  var  from  next input record; +                             set NR, FNR. + +       getline var <file     Set var from next record of  file. + +       command | getline [var] +                             Run   command  piping  the  output +                             either into $0 or var, as above. + +       command |& getline [var] +                             Run command as a co-process piping +                             the  output either into $0 or var, +                             as above.  Co-processes are a gawk +                             extension.  (command can also be a +                             socket.  See the  subsection  Spe- +                             cial File Names, below.) + +       next                  Stop  processing the current input +                             record.  The next input record  is +                             read  and  processing  starts over +                             with the first pattern in the  AWK +                             program.   If the end of the input +                             data is reached, the END block(s), +                             if any, are executed. + +       nextfile              Stop  processing the current input +                             file.  The next input record  read +                             comes  from  the  next input file. +                             FILENAME and ARGIND  are  updated, +                             FNR  is reset to 1, and processing +                             starts over with the first pattern +                             in  the AWK program. If the end of +                             the input data is reached, the END +                             block(s), if any, are executed. + +       print                 Prints  the  current  record.  The +                             output record is  terminated  with +                             the value of the ORS variable. + +       print expr-list       Prints  expressions.  Each expres- +                             sion is separated by the value  of +                             the   OFS  variable.   The  output +                             record  is  terminated  with   the +                             value of the ORS variable. + +       print expr-list >file Prints  expressions on file.  Each +                             expression  is  separated  by  the +                             value  of  the  OFS variable.  The +                             output record is  terminated  with +                             the value of the ORS variable. + +       printf fmt, expr-list Format and print. + +       printf fmt, expr-list >file +                             Format and print on file. + +       system(cmd-line)      Execute  the command cmd-line, and +                             return the exit status.  (This may +                             not be available on non-POSIX sys- +                             tems.) + +       fflush([file])        Flush any buffers associated  with +                             the open output file or pipe file. +                             If file is missing, then  standard +                             output is flushed.  If file is the +                             null string, then all open  output +                             files and pipes have their buffers +                             flushed. + +       Additional output redirections are allowed for print and +       printf. + +       print ... >> file +              Appends output to the file. + +       print ... | command +              Writes on a pipe. + +       print ... |& command +              Sends  data to a co-process or socket.  (See also +              the subsection Special File Names, below.) + +       The getline command returns 0 on end of file and  -1  on +       an  error.   Upon  an  error,  ERRNO  contains  a string +       describing the problem. + +       NOTE: If using a pipe, co-process, or socket to getline, +       or  from  print  or  printf  within a loop, you must use +       close() to  create  new  instances  of  the  command  or +       socket.   AWK  does not automatically close pipes, sock- +       ets, or co-processes when they return EOF. + +   The printf Statement +       The AWK versions of the printf statement  and  sprintf() +       function  (see  below)  accept  the following conversion +       specification formats: + +       %c      An ASCII character.  If the argument used for %c +               is  numeric,  it  is  treated as a character and +               printed.  Otherwise, the argument is assumed  to +               be  a  string,  and  the only first character of +               that string is printed. + +       %d, %i  A decimal number (the integer part). + +       %e, %E  A   floating   point   number   of   the    form +               [-]d.dddddde[+-]dd.    The   %E  format  uses  E +               instead of e. + +       %f, %F  A   floating   point   number   of   the    form +               [-]ddd.dddddd.   If  the system library supports +               it, %F is available as well. This  is  like  %f, +               but uses capital letters for special "not a num- +               ber" and "infinity" values. If %F is not  avail- +               able, gawk uses %f. + +       %g, %G  Use  %e  or %f conversion, whichever is shorter, +               with nonsignificant zeros  suppressed.   The  %G +               format uses %E instead of %e. + +       %o      An unsigned octal number (also an integer). + +       %u      An  unsigned decimal number (again, an integer). + +       %s      A character string. + +       %x, %X  An unsigned  hexadecimal  number  (an  integer). +               The %X format uses ABCDEF instead of abcdef. + +       %%      A  single % character; no argument is converted. + +       NOTE: When using the integer format-control letters  for +       values  that  are outside the range of a C long integer, +       gawk switches to the %0f format specifier. If --lint  is +       provided  on  the  command  line  gawk warns about this. +       Other versions of awk may print  invalid  values  or  do +       something else entirely. + +       Optional,  additional  parameters  may lie between the % +       and the control letter: + +       count$ Use the count'th argument at this  point  in  the +              formatting.   This  is called a positional speci- +              fier and is intended primarily for use in  trans- +              lated  versions  of  format  strings,  not in the +              original text of an AWK program.  It  is  a  gawk +              extension. + +       -      The  expression  should  be left-justified within +              its field. + +       space  For numeric conversions, prefix  positive  values +              with  a  space,  and negative values with a minus +              sign. + +       +      The plus sign, used  before  the  width  modifier +              (see  below),  says  to  always supply a sign for +              numeric conversions, even if the data to be  for- +              matted  is  positive.   The + overrides the space +              modifier. + +       #      Use an "alternate form" for certain control  let- +              ters.   For  %o,  supply a leading zero.  For %x, +              and %X, supply a leading 0x or 0X for  a  nonzero +              result.  For %e, %E, %f and %F, the result always +              contains a decimal point.  For %g, and %G, trail- +              ing zeros are not removed from the result. + +       0      A leading 0 (zero) acts as a flag, that indicates +              output should be padded with  zeroes  instead  of +              spaces.   This applies even to non-numeric output +              formats.  This flag only has an effect  when  the +              field  width  is  wider  than  the  value  to  be +              printed. + +       width  The field should be padded to  this  width.   The +              field  is  normally padded with spaces.  If the 0 +              flag has been used, it is padded with zeroes. + +       .prec  A number that specifies the precision to use when +              printing.   For  the  %e, %E, %f and %F, formats, +              this specifies the  number  of  digits  you  want +              printed  to  the right of the decimal point.  For +              the %g, and %G formats, it specifies the  maximum +              number  of  significant  digits.  For the %d, %o, +              %i, %u, %x, and %X formats, it specifies the min- +              imum number of digits to print.  For %s, it spec- +              ifies the maximum number of characters  from  the +              string that should be printed. + +       The  dynamic  width  and prec capabilities of the ANSI C +       printf() routines are supported.  A * in place of either +       the  width or prec specifications causes their values to +       be taken from the argument list to printf or  sprintf(). +       To  use  a  positional specifier with a dynamic width or +       precision, supply the count$ after the * in  the  format +       string.  For example, "%3$*2$.*1$s". + +   Special File Names +       When  doing  I/O redirection from either print or printf +       into a file, or via getline from a file, gawk recognizes +       certain  special  filenames internally.  These filenames +       allow access to open  file  descriptors  inherited  from +       gawk's  parent  process (usually the shell).  These file +       names may also be used on the command line to name  data +       files.  The filenames are: + +       /dev/stdin  The standard input. + +       /dev/stdout The standard output. + +       /dev/stderr The standard error output. + +       /dev/fd/n   The  file  associated  with  the  open  file +                   descriptor n. + +       These are particularly useful for error  messages.   For +       example: + +              print "You blew it!" > "/dev/stderr" + +       whereas you would otherwise have to use + +              print "You blew it!" | "cat 1>&2" + +       The  following special filenames may be used with the |& +       co-process operator for creating TCP/IP network  connec- +       tions. + +       /inet/tcp/lport/rhost/rport  File  for TCP/IP connection +                                    on  local  port  lport   to +                                    remote host rhost on remote +                                    port rport.  Use a port  of +                                    0 to have the system pick a +                                    port. + +       /inet/udp/lport/rhost/rport  Similar,  but  use   UDP/IP +                                    instead of TCP/IP. + +       /inet/raw/lport/rhost/rport  Reserved for future use. + +       Other  special  filenames  provide access to information +       about the running gawk process.  These filenames are now +       obsolete.  Use the PROCINFO array to obtain the informa- +       tion they provide.  The filenames are: + +       /dev/pid    Reading this file returns the process ID  of +                   the  current process, in decimal, terminated +                   with a newline. + +       /dev/ppid   Reading this file returns the parent process +                   ID  of the current process, in decimal, ter- +                   minated with a newline. + +       /dev/pgrpid Reading this file returns the process  group +                   ID  of the current process, in decimal, ter- +                   minated with a newline. + +       /dev/user   Reading this file returns  a  single  record +                   terminated  with  a newline.  The fields are +                   separated with spaces.  $1 is the  value  of +                   the  getuid(2)  system call, $2 is the value +                   of the geteuid(2) system  call,  $3  is  the +                   value  of  the getgid(2) system call, and $4 +                   is the value of the getegid(2) system  call. +                   If there are any additional fields, they are +                   the  group  IDs  returned  by  getgroups(2). +                   Multiple  groups may not be supported on all +                   systems. + +   Numeric Functions +       AWK has the following built-in arithmetic functions: + + +       atan2(y, x)   Returns the arctangent of y/x in  radians. + +       cos(expr)     Returns  the  cosine  of expr, which is in +                     radians. + +       exp(expr)     The exponential function. + +       int(expr)     Truncates to integer. + +       log(expr)     The natural logarithm function. + +       rand()        Returns a random number N, between  0  and +                     1, such that 0 <= N < 1. + +       sin(expr)     Returns  the  sine  of  expr,  which is in +                     radians. + +       sqrt(expr)    The square root function. + +       srand([expr]) Uses expr as a new  seed  for  the  random +                     number generator.  If no expr is provided, +                     the time of day is used.  The return value +                     is the previous seed for the random number +                     generator. + +   String Functions +       Gawk has the following built-in string functions: + + +       asort(s [, d])          Returns the number  of  elements +                               in the source array s.  The con- +                               tents  of  s  are  sorted  using +                               gawk's  normal rules for compar- +                               ing values, and the  indices  of +                               the   sorted  values  of  s  are +                               replaced with  sequential  inte- +                               gers  starting  with  1.  If the +                               optional destination array d  is +                               specified,   then   s  is  first +                               duplicated into d, and then d is +                               sorted,  leaving  the indices of +                               the source array s unchanged. + +       asorti(s [, d])         Returns the number  of  elements +                               in  the  source  array  s.   The +                               behavior is the same as that  of +                               asort(),  except  that the array +                               indices are  used  for  sorting, +                               not   the  array  values.   When +                               done,  the  array   is   indexed +                               numerically,  and the values are +                               those of the  original  indices. +                               The  original  values  are lost; +                               thus provide a second  array  if +                               you  wish to preserve the origi- +                               nal. + +       gensub(r, s, h [, t])   Search the target string  t  for +                               matches  of  the regular expres- +                               sion r.  If h is a string begin- +                               ning  with  g or G, then replace +                               all matches of r with s.  Other- +                               wise,  h  is a number indicating +                               which match of r to replace.  If +                               t  is  not  supplied, $0 is used +                               instead.  Within the replacement +                               text s, the sequence \n, where n +                               is a digit from 1 to 9,  may  be +                               used  to  indicate just the text +                               that matched the n'th  parenthe- +                               sized     subexpression.     The +                               sequence   \0   represents   the +                               entire matched text, as does the +                               character &.  Unlike  sub()  and +                               gsub(),  the  modified string is +                               returned as the  result  of  the +                               function,  and the original tar- +                               get string is not changed. + +       gsub(r, s [, t])        For each substring matching  the +                               regular   expression  r  in  the +                               string t, substitute the  string +                               s, and return the number of sub- +                               stitutions.  If t  is  not  sup- +                               plied,  use  $0.   An  &  in the +                               replacement  text  is   replaced +                               with  the text that was actually +                               matched.  Use \& to get  a  lit- +                               eral  &.  (This must be typed as +                               "\\&"; see GAWK:  Effective  AWK +                               Programming for a fuller discus- +                               sion of the rules  for  &'s  and +                               backslashes  in  the replacement +                               text of sub(), gsub(), and  gen- +                               sub().) + +       index(s, t)             Returns  the index of the string +                               t in the string s, or 0 if t  is +                               not present.  (This implies that +                               character indices start at one.) + +       length([s])             Returns the length of the string +                               s, or the length of $0 if  s  is +                               not   supplied.   Starting  with +                               version 3.1.5, as a non-standard +                               extension,  with  an array argu- +                               ment, length() returns the  num- +                               ber of elements in the array. + +       match(s, r [, a])       Returns  the position in s where +                               the regular expression r occurs, +                               or  0  if  r is not present, and +                               sets the values  of  RSTART  and +                               RLENGTH.  Note that the argument +                               order is the same as for  the  ~ +                               operator:  str ~ re.  If array a +                               is provided, a  is  cleared  and +                               then  elements  1  through n are +                               filled with the  portions  of  s +                               that   match  the  corresponding +                               parenthesized  subexpression  in +                               r.   The  0'th element of a con- +                               tains the portion of  s  matched +                               by the entire regular expression +                               r.   Subscripts  a[n,  "start"], +                               and  a[n,  "length"] provide the +                               starting index in the string and +                               length   respectively,  of  each +                               matching substring. + +       split(s, a [, r])       Splits the  string  s  into  the +                               array  a  on the regular expres- +                               sion r, and returns  the  number +                               of  fields.  If r is omitted, FS +                               is used instead.  The array a is +                               cleared     first.     Splitting +                               behaves  identically  to   field +                               splitting, described above. + +       sprintf(fmt, expr-list) Prints  expr-list  according  to +                               fmt, and returns  the  resulting +                               string. + +       strtonum(str)           Examines  str,  and  returns its +                               numeric value.   If  str  begins +                               with  a  leading  0,  strtonum() +                               assumes that  str  is  an  octal +                               number.   If  str  begins with a +                               leading  0x  or  0X,  strtonum() +                               assumes  that str is a hexadeci- +                               mal number. + +       sub(r, s [, t])         Just like gsub(), but  only  the +                               first   matching   substring  is +                               replaced. + +       substr(s, i [, n])      Returns the at most  n-character +                               substring  of  s  starting at i. +                               If n is omitted, the rest  of  s +                               is used. + +       tolower(str)            Returns  a  copy  of  the string +                               str,  with  all  the  upper-case +                               characters  in str translated to +                               their  corresponding  lower-case +                               counterparts.     Non-alphabetic +                               characters are left unchanged. + +       toupper(str)            Returns a  copy  of  the  string +                               str,  with  all  the  lower-case +                               characters in str translated  to +                               their  corresponding  upper-case +                               counterparts.     Non-alphabetic +                               characters are left unchanged. + +       As  of  version  3.1.5,  gawk  is multibyte aware.  This +       means that index(), length(), substr() and  match()  all +       work in terms of characters, not bytes. + +   Time Functions +       Since  one  of  the primary uses of AWK programs is pro- +       cessing log files that contain time  stamp  information, +       gawk provides the following functions for obtaining time +       stamps and formatting them. + + +       mktime(datespec) +                 Turns datespec into a time stamp of  the  same +                 form  as  returned by systime().  The datespec +                 is a string of the form YYYY MM DD HH  MM  SS[ +                 DST].   The  contents of the string are six or +                 seven numbers  representing  respectively  the +                 full  year including century, the month from 1 +                 to 12, the day of the month from 1 to 31,  the +                 hour  of the day from 0 to 23, the minute from +                 0 to 59, and the second from 0 to 60,  and  an +                 optional  daylight saving flag.  The values of +                 these numbers need not be  within  the  ranges +                 specified;  for example, an hour of -1 means 1 +                 hour before midnight.  The origin-zero  Grego- +                 rian  calendar is assumed, with year 0 preced- +                 ing year 1 and year -1 preceding year 0.   The +                 time  is  assumed to be in the local timezone. +                 If the daylight saving flag is  positive,  the +                 time is assumed to be daylight saving time; if +                 zero, the time is assumed to be standard time; +                 and   if   negative  (the  default),  mktime() +                 attempts to determine whether daylight  saving +                 time  is in effect for the specified time.  If +                 datespec does not contain enough  elements  or +                 if   the  resulting  time  is  out  of  range, +                 mktime() returns -1. + +       strftime([format [, timestamp[, utc-flag]]]) +                 Formats timestamp according to the  specifica- +                 tion in format.  If utc-flag is present and is +                 non-zero or non-null, the result  is  in  UTC, +                 otherwise  the  result  is in local time.  The +                 timestamp  should  be  of  the  same  form  as +                 returned  by systime().  If timestamp is miss- +                 ing, the current time of day is used.  If for- +                 mat is missing, a default format equivalent to +                 the output of date(1) is used.  See the speci- +                 fication for the strftime() function in ANSI C +                 for the format conversions that are guaranteed +                 to be available. + +       systime() Returns  the current time of day as the number +                 of  seconds  since   the   Epoch   (1970-01-01 +                 00:00:00 UTC on POSIX systems). + +   Bit Manipulations Functions +       Starting  with  version  3.1  of gawk, the following bit +       manipulation functions are available.  They work by con- +       verting   double-precision   floating  point  values  to +       uintmax_t integers, doing the operation, and  then  con- +       verting  the  result  back to floating point.  The func- +       tions are: + +       and(v1, v2)         Return the bitwise AND of the values +                           provided by v1 and v2. + +       compl(val)          Return  the  bitwise  complement  of +                           val. + +       lshift(val, count)  Return the  value  of  val,  shifted +                           left by count bits. + +       or(v1, v2)          Return  the bitwise OR of the values +                           provided by v1 and v2. + +       rshift(val, count)  Return the  value  of  val,  shifted +                           right by count bits. + +       xor(v1, v2)         Return the bitwise XOR of the values +                           provided by v1 and v2. + + +   Internationalization Functions +       Starting with version 3.1 of gawk, the  following  func- +       tions  may  be  used  from  within  your AWK program for +       translating strings at run-time.  For full details,  see +       GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + +       bindtextdomain(directory [, domain]) +              Specifies  the directory where gawk looks for the +              .mo files, in case they will  not  or  cannot  be +              placed  in the ``standard'' locations (e.g., dur- +              ing testing).  It  returns  the  directory  where +              domain is ``bound.'' +              The  default  domain  is the value of TEXTDOMAIN. +              If directory is the null string (""), then  bind- +              textdomain()  returns the current binding for the +              given domain. + +       dcgettext(string [, domain [, category]]) +              Returns the translation of string in text  domain +              domain for locale category category.  The default +              value for domain is the current value of  TEXTDO- +              MAIN.  The default value for category is "LC_MES- +              SAGES". +              If you supply a value for category, it must be  a +              string  equal  to  one  of the known locale cate- +              gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK  Program- +              ming.   You  must also supply a text domain.  Use +              TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + +       dcngettext(string1 , string2 , number [, domain [, cate- +       gory]]) +              Returns  the  plural  form used for number of the +              translation of string1 and string2 in text domain +              domain for locale category category.  The default +              value for domain is the current value of  TEXTDO- +              MAIN.  The default value for category is "LC_MES- +              SAGES". +              If you supply a value for category, it must be  a +              string  equal  to  one  of the known locale cate- +              gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK  Program- +              ming.   You  must also supply a text domain.  Use +              TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + +USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS +       Functions in AWK are defined as follows: + +              function name(parameter list) { statements } + +       Functions  are executed when they are called from within +       expressions  in  either  patterns  or  actions.   Actual +       parameters  supplied  in  the  function call are used to +       instantiate the formal parameters declared in the  func- +       tion.   Arrays  are passed by reference, other variables +       are passed by value. + +       Since functions were not originally part of the AWK lan- +       guage,  the  provision  for  local  variables  is rather +       clumsy: They are declared as  extra  parameters  in  the +       parameter  list.   The  convention  is to separate local +       variables from real parameters by extra  spaces  in  the +       parameter list.  For example: + +              function  f(p, q,     a, b)   # a and b are local +              { +                   ... +              } + +              /abc/     { ... ; f(1, 2) ; ... } + +       The  left  parenthesis in a function call is required to +       immediately follow the function name, without any inter- +       vening  white  space.  This avoids a syntactic ambiguity +       with the concatenation operator.  This restriction  does +       not apply to the built-in functions listed above. + +       Functions  may  call  each  other  and may be recursive. +       Function parameters used as local variables are initial- +       ized  to  the null string and the number zero upon func- +       tion invocation. + +       Use return expr to return a value from a function.   The +       return value is undefined if no value is provided, or if +       the function returns by "falling off" the end. + +       If --lint has been provided, gawk warns about  calls  to +       undefined  functions  at  parse  time, instead of at run +       time.  Calling an undefined function at run  time  is  a +       fatal error. + +       The word func may be used in place of function. + +DYNAMICALLY LOADING NEW FUNCTIONS +       Beginning  with version 3.1 of gawk, you can dynamically +       add new built-in functions to the  running  gawk  inter- +       preter.   The  full details are beyond the scope of this +       manual page; see GAWK: Effective AWK Programming for the +       details. + + +       extension(object, function) +               Dynamically link the shared object file named by +               object, and invoke function in that  object,  to +               perform  initialization.   These  should both be +               provided as strings.  Returns the value returned +               by function. + +       This function is provided and documented in GAWK: Effec- +       tive AWK Programming, but everything about this  feature +       is  likely  to change eventually.  We STRONGLY recommend +       that you do not use this feature for anything  that  you +       aren't willing to redo. + +SIGNALS +       pgawk  accepts two signals.  SIGUSR1 causes it to dump a +       profile and function call stack  to  the  profile  file, +       which  is either awkprof.out, or whatever file was named +       with the --profile option.  It then  continues  to  run. +       SIGHUP  causes  pgawk  to  dump the profile and function +       call stack and then exit. + +EXAMPLES +       Print and sort the login names of all users: + +            BEGIN     { FS = ":" } +                 { print $1 | "sort" } + +       Count lines in a file: + +                 { nlines++ } +            END  { print nlines } + +       Precede each line by its number in the file: + +            { print FNR, $0 } + +       Concatenate and line number (a variation on a theme): + +            { print NR, $0 } +       Run an external command for particular lines of data: + +            tail -f access_log | +            awk '/myhome.html/ { system("nmap " $1 ">> logdir/myhome.html") }' + +INTERNATIONALIZATION +       String constants are sequences of characters enclosed in +       double quotes.  In non-English speaking environments, it +       is possible to  mark  strings  in  the  AWK  program  as +       requiring  translation  to  the native natural language. +       Such strings are marked in the AWK program with a  lead- +       ing underscore ("_").  For example, + +              gawk 'BEGIN { print "hello, world" }' + +       always prints hello, world.  But, + +              gawk 'BEGIN { print _"hello, world" }' + +       might print bonjour, monde in France. + +       There  are  several steps involved in producing and run- +       ning a localizable AWK program. + +       1.  Add a BEGIN action to assign a value to the  TEXTDO- +           MAIN variable to set the text domain to a name asso- +           ciated with your program. + +           BEGIN { TEXTDOMAIN = "myprog" } + +       This allows gawk to find the .mo  file  associated  with +       your program.  Without this step, gawk uses the messages +       text domain, which likely does not contain  translations +       for your program. + +       2.  Mark  all  strings  that  should  be translated with +           leading underscores. + +       3.  If necessary, use the dcgettext() and/or bindtextdo- +           main() functions in your program, as appropriate. + +       4.  Run  gawk --gen-po -f myprog.awk > myprog.po to gen- +           erate a .po file for your program. + +       5.  Provide  appropriate  translations,  and  build  and +           install the corresponding .mo files. + +       The  internationalization features are described in full +       detail in GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + +POSIX COMPATIBILITY +       A primary goal for gawk is compatibility with the  POSIX +       standard,  as  well  as  with the latest version of UNIX +       awk.  To this end, gawk incorporates the following  user +       visible  features  which  are  not  described in the AWK +       book, but are part of the Bell Laboratories  version  of +       awk, and are in the POSIX standard. + +       The book indicates that command line variable assignment +       happens when awk would otherwise open the argument as  a +       file,  which is after the BEGIN block is executed.  How- +       ever, in earlier implementations, when such  an  assign- +       ment  appeared  before  any  file  names, the assignment +       would happen before the BEGIN block was  run.   Applica- +       tions  came  to  depend on this "feature."  When awk was +       changed to match its documentation, the  -v  option  for +       assigning  variables  before program execution was added +       to accommodate applications that depended upon  the  old +       behavior.   (This  feature  was  agreed upon by both the +       Bell Laboratories and the GNU developers.) + +       The -W option for implementation  specific  features  is +       from the POSIX standard. + +       When  processing arguments, gawk uses the special option +       "--" to signal the end of arguments.   In  compatibility +       mode,  it  warns  about  but otherwise ignores undefined +       options.  In normal operation, such arguments are passed +       on to the AWK program for it to process. + +       The  AWK  book  does  not  define  the  return  value of +       srand().  The POSIX standard has it return the  seed  it +       was  using,  to  allow  keeping  track  of random number +       sequences.  Therefore srand() in gawk also  returns  its +       current seed. + +       Other  new  features are: The use of multiple -f options +       (from MKS awk); the ENVIRON array; the \a, and \v escape +       sequences (done originally in gawk and fed back into the +       Bell Laboratories version); the tolower() and  toupper() +       built-in functions (from the Bell Laboratories version); +       and the ANSI C conversion specifications in printf (done +       first in the Bell Laboratories version). + +HISTORICAL FEATURES +       There are two features of historical AWK implementations +       that gawk supports.  First, it is possible to  call  the +       length()  built-in  function  not only with no argument, +       but even without parentheses!  Thus, + +              a = length     # Holy Algol 60, Batman! + +       is the same as either of + +              a = length() +              a = length($0) + +       This feature is marked  as  "deprecated"  in  the  POSIX +       standard,  and  gawk  issues  a warning about its use if +       --lint is specified on the command line. + +       The other feature is the use of either the  continue  or +       the  break  statements outside the body of a while, for, +       or  do  loop.   Traditional  AWK  implementations   have +       treated  such usage as equivalent to the next statement. +       Gawk supports this usage if --traditional has been spec- +       ified. + +GNU EXTENSIONS +       Gawk  has a number of extensions to POSIX awk.  They are +       described in this section.  All the extensions described +       here  can be disabled by invoking gawk with the --tradi- +       tional or --posix options. + +       The following features of  gawk  are  not  available  in +       POSIX awk. + +       · No path search is performed for files named via the -f +         option.  Therefore the AWKPATH environment variable is +         not special. + +       · The \x escape sequence.  (Disabled with --posix.) + +       · The fflush() function.  (Disabled with --posix.) + +       · The  ability  to continue lines after ?  and :.  (Dis- +         abled with --posix.) + +       · Octal and hexadecimal constants in AWK programs. + +       · The ARGIND, BINMODE, ERRNO, LINT,  RT  and  TEXTDOMAIN +         variables are not special. + +       · The  IGNORECASE  variable and its side-effects are not +         available. + +       · The FIELDWIDTHS variable and fixed-width field  split- +         ting. + +       · The PROCINFO array is not available. + +       · The use of RS as a regular expression. + +       · The  special  file names available for I/O redirection +         are not recognized. + +       · The |& operator for creating co-processes. + +       · The ability to split out individual  characters  using +         the  null  string as the value of FS, and as the third +         argument to split(). + +       · The optional second argument to the close()  function. + +       · The optional third argument to the match() function. + +       · The  ability  to use positional specifiers with printf +         and sprintf(). + +       · The ability to pass an array to length(). + +       · The use of delete array to delete the entire  contents +         of an array. + +       · The  use of nextfile to abandon processing of the cur- +         rent input file. + +       · The  and(),   asort(),   asorti(),   bindtextdomain(), +         compl(),    dcgettext(),    dcngettext(),    gensub(), +         lshift(), mktime(), or(), rshift(),  strftime(),  str- +         tonum(), systime() and xor() functions. + +       · Localizable strings. + +       · Adding  new  built-in  functions  dynamically with the +         extension() function. + +       The AWK book does not define the  return  value  of  the +       close() function.  Gawk's close() returns the value from +       fclose(3), or pclose(3), when closing an output file  or +       pipe,  respectively.  It returns the process's exit sta- +       tus when closing an input pipe.  The return value is  -1 +       if  the  named  file,  pipe or co-process was not opened +       with a redirection. + +       When gawk is invoked with the --traditional  option,  if +       the  fs argument to the -F option is "t", then FS is set +       to the tab character.  Note that typing  gawk  -F\t  ... +       simply  causes  the shell to quote the "t," and does not +       pass "\t" to the -F option.  Since this is a rather ugly +       special  case,  it  is  not  the default behavior.  This +       behavior also does not occur if --posix has been  speci- +       fied.   To really get a tab character as the field sepa- +       rator, it is best to use single quotes: gawk -F'\t' .... + +       If gawk is configured with the --enable-switch option to +       the configure command, then  it  accepts  an  additional +       control-flow statement: +              switch (expression) { +              case value|regex : statement +              ... +              [ default: statement ] +              } + +       If  gawk  is  configured with the --disable-directories- +       fatal option, then it  will  silently  skip  directories +       named  on  the  command  line.  Otherwise, it will do so +       only if invoked with the --traditional option. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES +       The AWKPATH environment variable can be used to  provide +       a  list  of  directories that gawk searches when looking +       for files named via the -f and --file options. + +       If POSIXLY_CORRECT exists in the environment, then  gawk +       behaves  exactly as if --posix had been specified on the +       command line.  If --lint has been specified, gawk issues +       a warning message to this effect. + +SEE ALSO +       egrep(1),  getpid(2), getppid(2), getpgrp(2), getuid(2), +       geteuid(2), getgid(2), getegid(2), getgroups(2) + +       The AWK Programming Language, Alfred V.  Aho,  Brian  W. +       Kernighan,  Peter  J.  Weinberger, Addison-Wesley, 1988. +       ISBN 0-201-07981-X. + +       GAWK: Effective AWK Programming, Edition 3.0,  published +       by the Free Software Foundation, 2001.  The current ver- +       sion  of  this   document   is   available   online   at +       http://www.gnu.org/software/gawk/manual. + +BUGS +       The  -F  option  is not necessary given the command line +       variable assignment feature; it remains only  for  back- +       wards compatibility. + +       Syntactically  invalid single character programs tend to +       overflow the parse stack, generating a rather  unhelpful +       message.   Such  programs  are surprisingly difficult to +       diagnose in the completely general case, and the  effort +       to do so really is not worth it. + +AUTHORS +       The original version of UNIX awk was designed and imple- +       mented  by  Alfred  Aho,  Peter  Weinberger,  and  Brian +       Kernighan of Bell Laboratories.  Brian Kernighan contin- +       ues to maintain and enhance it. + +       Paul Rubin and Jay Fenlason, of the Free Software  Foun- +       dation,  wrote  gawk, to be compatible with the original +       version of awk  distributed  in  Seventh  Edition  UNIX. +       John  Woods  contributed  a  number of bug fixes.  David +       Trueman, with contributions from  Arnold  Robbins,  made +       gawk  compatible  with  the  new  version  of  UNIX awk. +       Arnold Robbins is the current maintainer. + +       The initial DOS port was done by Conrad Kwok  and  Scott +       Garfinkle.   Scott Deifik is the current DOS maintainer. +       Pat Rankin did the port to VMS,  and  Michal  Jaegermann +       did the port to the Atari ST.  The port to OS/2 was done +       by Kai Uwe Rommel, with contributions and help from Dar- +       rel  Hankerson.  Juan M. Guerrero now maintains the OS/2 +       port.  Fred Fish supplied support  for  the  Amiga,  and +       Martin  Brown  provided  the  BeOS port.  Stephen Davies +       provided the original Tandem port, and  Matthew  Woehlke +       provided changes for Tandem's POSIX-compliant systems. + +VERSION INFORMATION +       This man page documents gawk, version 3.1.6. + +BUG REPORTS +       If  you  find a bug in gawk, please send electronic mail +       to bug-gawk@gnu.org.  Please include your operating sys- +       tem  and  its  revision,  the version of gawk (from gawk +       --version), what C compiler you used to compile it,  and +       a  test  program  and data that are as small as possible +       for reproducing the problem. + +       Before sending a bug report,  please  do  the  following +       things.   First, verify that you have the latest version +       of gawk.  Many bugs (usually subtle ones) are  fixed  at +       each  release,  and if yours is out of date, the problem +       may already have been solved.   Second,  please  see  if +       setting  the  environment  variable  LC_ALL  to LC_ALL=C +       causes things to behave as you expect.  If  so,  it's  a +       locale  issue,  and  may  or  may  not  really be a bug. +       Finally, please read this man  page  and  the  reference +       manual carefully to be sure that what you think is a bug +       really is, instead of just a quirk in the language. + +       Whatever  you  do,  do  NOT  post  a   bug   report   in +       comp.lang.awk.   While  the gawk developers occasionally +       read this newsgroup, posting bug  reports  there  is  an +       unreliable  way to report bugs.  Instead, please use the +       electronic mail addresses given above. + +       If you're using a GNU/Linux system or BSD-based  system, +       you  may  wish  to  submit a bug report to the vendor of +       your distribution.  That's fine, but please send a  copy +       to  the official email address as well, since there's no +       guarantee that the bug will be  forwarded  to  the  gawk +       maintainer. + +ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS +       Brian  Kernighan  of Bell Laboratories provided valuable +       assistance during testing and debugging.  We thank  him. + +COPYING PERMISSIONS +       Copyright  ©  1989,  1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, +       1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002,  2003,  2004,  2005,  2007 +       Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +       Permission  is  granted  to make and distribute verbatim +       copies of this manual page provided the copyright notice +       and  this permission notice are preserved on all copies. + +       Permission is granted to copy  and  distribute  modified +       versions  of  this  manual page under the conditions for +       verbatim copying, provided  that  the  entire  resulting +       derived work is distributed under the terms of a permis- +       sion notice identical to this one. + +       Permission is granted to copy  and  distribute  transla- +       tions  of  this manual page into another language, under +       the above conditions for modified versions, except  that +       this  permission  notice  may be stated in a translation +       approved by the Foundation. + + + +Free Software Foundation          Oct 19 2007                          GAWK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/groups.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/groups.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f08bc6d --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/groups.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +GROUPS(1)                User Commands                GROUPS(1) + + + + + +NAME +       groups - print the groups a user is in + +SYNOPSIS +       groups [OPTION]... [USERNAME]... + +DESCRIPTION +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Same as id -Gn.  If no USERNAME, use current process. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for  groups is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info  and  groups  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info groups + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +groups 5.3.0             November 2004                GROUPS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/head.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/head.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..851f555 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/head.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +HEAD(1)                  User Commands                  HEAD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       head - output the first part of files + +SYNOPSIS +       head [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print  the  first 10 lines of each FILE to standard out- +       put.  With more than  one  FILE,  precede  each  with  a +       header giving the file name.  With no FILE, or when FILE +       is -, read standard input. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -c, --bytes=[-]N +              print  the  first  N bytes of each file; with the +              leading `-', print all but the last  N  bytes  of +              each file + +       -n, --lines=[-]N +              print  the first N lines instead of the first 10; +              with the leading `-', print all but  the  last  N +              lines of each file + +       -q, --quiet, --silent +              never print headers giving file names + +       -v, --verbose +              always print headers giving file names + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       N  may  have  a  multiplier  suffix:  b  512,  k 1024, m +       1024*1024. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for head is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and head programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info head + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +head 5.3.0               November 2004                  HEAD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostid.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostid.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57f4b2c --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostid.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +HOSTID(1)                User Commands                HOSTID(1) + + + + + +NAME +       hostid  -  print  the numeric identifier for the current +       host + +SYNOPSIS +       hostid + +       hostid OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Print the numeric identifier (in  hexadecimal)  for  the +       current host. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for  hostid is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info  and  hostid  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info hostid + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +hostid 5.3.0             November 2004                HOSTID(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e774633 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/hostname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +HOSTNAME(1)              User Commands              HOSTNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME +       hostname  -  set  or  print the name of the current host +       system + +SYNOPSIS +       hostname [NAME] +       hostname OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Print or set the hostname of the current system. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for hostname is maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If the info and hostname programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info hostname + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +hostname 5.3.0           November 2004              HOSTNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/id.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/id.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f2d40f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/id.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +ID(1)                    User Commands                    ID(1) + + + + + +NAME +       id - print real and effective UIDs and GIDs + +SYNOPSIS +       id [OPTION]... [USERNAME] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print information for USERNAME, or the current user. + +       -a     ignore, for compatibility with other versions + +       -g, --group +              print only the effective group ID + +       -G, --groups +              print all group IDs + +       -n, --name +              print a name instead of a number, for -ugG + +       -r, --real +              print  the  real  ID instead of the effective ID, +              with -ugG + +       -u, --user +              print only the effective user ID + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Without any OPTION, print some useful set of  identified +       information. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Arnold Robbins and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for id is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  id  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info id + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +id 5.3.0                 November 2004                    ID(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/igawk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/igawk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3d142c --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/igawk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +IGAWK(1)                       Utility Commands                       IGAWK(1) + + + +NAME +       igawk - gawk with include files + +SYNOPSIS +       igawk  [  all gawk options ] -f program-file [ -- ] file +       ... +       igawk [ all gawk options ] [ -- ] program-text file  ... + +DESCRIPTION +       Igawk  is a simple shell script that adds the ability to +       have ``include files'' to gawk(1). + +       AWK programs for igawk are the same as for gawk,  except +       that, in addition, you may have lines like + +              @include getopt.awk + +       in  your  program  to  include  the file getopt.awk from +       either the current directory or one of the other  direc- +       tories in the search path. + +OPTIONS +       See  gawk(1)  for a full description of the AWK language +       and the options that gawk supports. + +EXAMPLES +       cat << EOF > test.awk +       @include getopt.awk + +       BEGIN { +            while (getopt(ARGC, ARGV, "am:q") != -1) +                 ... +       } +       EOF + +       igawk -f test.awk + +SEE ALSO +       gawk(1) + +       Effective AWK Programming, Edition 1.0, published by the +       Free Software Foundation, 1995. + +AUTHOR +       Arnold Robbins (arnold@skeeve.com). + + + +Free Software Foundation          Nov 3 1999                          IGAWK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/install.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/install.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..369116e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/install.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +INSTALL(1)               User Commands               INSTALL(1) + + + + + +NAME +       install - copy files and set attributes + +SYNOPSIS +       install [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST +       install [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY +       install [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE... +       install [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORY... + +DESCRIPTION +       In  the first three forms, copy SOURCE to DEST or multi- +       ple SOURCE(s) to the existing DIRECTORY,  while  setting +       permission modes and owner/group.  In the 4th form, cre- +       ate all components of the given DIRECTORY(ies). + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       --backup[=CONTROL] make a backup of each existing desti- +              nation file + +       -b     like --backup but does not accept an argument + +       -c     (ignored) + +       -d, --directory +              treat all arguments as  directory  names;  create +              all components of the specified directories + +       -D     create  all leading components of DEST except the +              last, then copy SOURCE to DEST + +       -g, --group=GROUP +              set group ownership, instead of process'  current +              group + +       -m, --mode=MODE +              set  permission  mode  (as  in chmod), instead of +              rwxr-xr-x + +       -o, --owner=OWNER +              set ownership (super-user only) + +       -p, --preserve-timestamps +              apply access/modification times of  SOURCE  files +              to corresponding destination files + +       -s, --strip +              strip symbol tables + +       -S, --suffix=SUFFIX override the usual backup suffix + +       -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY +              copy all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY + +       -T, --no-target-directory +              treat DEST as a normal file + +       -v, --verbose +              print the name of each directory as it is created + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       The backup suffix is `~', unless set  with  --suffix  or +       SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.  The version control method may be +       selected via the --backup option  or  through  the  VER- +       SION_CONTROL environment variable.  Here are the values: + +       none, off +              never make backups (even if --backup is given) + +       numbered, t +              make numbered backups + +       existing, nil +              numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- +              wise + +       simple, never +              always make simple backups + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for install is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and  install  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info install + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +install 5.3.0            November 2004               INSTALL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/join.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/join.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32597ba --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/join.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +JOIN(1)                  User Commands                  JOIN(1) + + + + + +NAME +       join - join lines of two files on a common field + +SYNOPSIS +       join [OPTION]... FILE1 FILE2 + +DESCRIPTION +       For each pair of input lines with identical join fields, +       write a line to standard output.  The default join field +       is  the  first,  delimited by whitespace.  When FILE1 or +       FILE2 (not both) is -, read standard input. + +       -a FILENUM +              print unpairable lines coming from file  FILENUM, +              where  FILENUM  is 1 or 2, corresponding to FILE1 +              or FILE2 + +       -e EMPTY +              replace missing input fields with EMPTY + +       -i, --ignore-case ignore differences in case  when  com- +              paring fields + +       -j FIELD +              equivalent to `-1 FIELD -2 FIELD' + +       -o FORMAT +              obey FORMAT while constructing output line + +       -t CHAR +              use CHAR as input and output field separator + +       -v FILENUM +              like -a FILENUM, but suppress joined output lines + +       -1 FIELD +              join on this FIELD of file 1 + +       -2 FIELD +              join on this FIELD of file 2 + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Unless -t CHAR is given, leading blanks separate  fields +       and are ignored, else fields are separated by CHAR.  Any +       FIELD is a field number counted from 1.  FORMAT  is  one +       or  more  comma  or blank separated specifications, each +       being `FILENUM.FIELD' or `0'.   Default  FORMAT  outputs +       the  join  field,  the  remaining fields from FILE1, the +       remaining fields from FILE2, all separated by CHAR. + +       Important: FILE1 and FILE2 must be sorted  on  the  join +       fields. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Mike Haertel. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for join is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and join programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info join + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +join 5.3.0               December 2004                  JOIN(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/kill.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/kill.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c7f87b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/kill.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +KILL(1)                  User Commands                  KILL(1) + + + + + +NAME +       kill - send signals to processes, or list signals + +SYNOPSIS +       kill [-s SIGNAL | -SIGNAL] PID... +       kill -l [SIGNAL]... +       kill -t [SIGNAL]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Send signals to processes, or list signals. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -s, --signal=SIGNAL, -SIGNAL + +              specify the name or number of the  signal  to  be +              sent + +       -l, --list +              list   signal  names,  or  convert  signal  names +              to/from numbers + +       -t, --table +              print a table of signal information + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIGNAL may be a signal name like `HUP', or a signal num- +       ber  like `1', or an exit status of a process terminated +       by a signal.  PID is an integer; if negative it  identi- +       fies a process group. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Paul Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for kill is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and kill programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info kill + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +kill 5.3.0               November 2004                  KILL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/link.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/link.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13e16f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/link.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +LINK(1)                  User Commands                  LINK(1) + + + + + +NAME +       link - call the link function to create a link to a file + +SYNOPSIS +       link FILE1 FILE2 +       link OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Call the link function to create a link named  FILE2  to +       an existing FILE1. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Michael Stone. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for link is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and link programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info link + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +link 5.3.0               November 2004                  LINK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ln.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ln.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b83cfff --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ln.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +LN(1)                    User Commands                    LN(1) + + + + + +NAME +       ln - make links between files + +SYNOPSIS +       ln [OPTION]... [-T] TARGET LINK_NAME   (1st form) +       ln [OPTION]... TARGET                  (2nd form) +       ln [OPTION]... TARGET... DIRECTORY     (3rd form) +       ln [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY TARGET...  (4th form) + +DESCRIPTION +       In  the  1st form, create a link to TARGET with the name +       LINK_NAME.  In the 2nd form, create a link to TARGET  in +       the current directory.  In the 3rd and 4th forms, create +       links to each TARGET in DIRECTORY.  Create hard links by +       default,  symbolic links with --symbolic.  When creating +       hard links, each TARGET must exist. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       --backup[=CONTROL] +              make a backup of each existing destination file + +       -b     like --backup but does not accept an argument + +       -d, -F, --directory +              allow  the  superuser  to  attempt  to  hard link +              directories (note: will probably fail due to sys- +              tem restrictions, even for the superuser) + +       -f, --force +              remove existing destination files + +       -n, --no-dereference +              treat  destination  that is a symlink to a direc- +              tory as if it were a normal file + +       -i, --interactive +              prompt whether to remove destinations + +       -s, --symbolic +              make symbolic links instead of hard links + +       -S, --suffix=SUFFIX +              override the usual backup suffix + +       -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY +              specify the DIRECTORY  in  which  to  create  the +              links + +       -T, --no-target-directory +              treat LINK_NAME as a normal file + +       -v, --verbose +              print name of each file before linking + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       The  backup  suffix  is `~', unless set with --suffix or +       SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.  The version control method may be +       selected   via   the  --backup  option  or  through  the +       VERSION_CONTROL environment variable.  Here are the val- +       ues: + +       none, off +              never make backups (even if --backup is given) + +       numbered, t +              make numbered backups + +       existing, nil +              numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- +              wise + +       simple, never +              always make simple backups + +AUTHOR +       Written by Mike Parker and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for ln is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  ln  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info ln + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +ln 5.3.0                 November 2004                    LN(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/logname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/logname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f75c71 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/logname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +LOGNAME(1)               User Commands               LOGNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME +       logname - print user's login name + +SYNOPSIS +       logname [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print the name of the current user. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by FIXME: unknown. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for logname is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and  logname  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info logname + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +logname 5.3.0            November 2004               LOGNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ls.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ls.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0240658 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ls.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +LS(1)                    User Commands                    LS(1) + + + + + +NAME +       ls - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS +       ls [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       List  information about the FILEs (the current directory +       by default).  Sort entries  alphabetically  if  none  of +       -cftuSUX nor --sort. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -a, --all +              do not ignore entries starting with . + +       -A, --almost-all +              do not list implied . and .. + +       --author +              with -l, print the author of each file + +       -b, --escape +              print octal escapes for nongraphic characters + +       --block-size=SIZE +              use SIZE-byte blocks + +       -B, --ignore-backups +              do not list implied entries ending with ~ + +       -c     with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of  last +              modification of file status information) with -l: +              show ctime and sort by name  otherwise:  sort  by +              ctime + +       -C     list entries by columns + +       --color[=WHEN] +              control whether color is used to distinguish file +              types.  WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto' + +       -d, --directory +              list directory entries instead of  contents,  and +              do not dereference symbolic links + +       -D, --dired +              generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode + +       -f     do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst + +       -F, --classify +              append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries + +       --format=WORD +              across  -x,  commas  -m,  horizontal -x, long -l, +              single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C + +       --full-time +              like -l --time-style=full-iso + +       -g     like -l, but do not list owner + +       -G, --no-group +              like -l, but do not list group + +       -h, --human-readable +              with -l, print sizes  in  human  readable  format +              (e.g., 1K 234M 2G) + +       --si   likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + +       -H, --dereference-command-line +              follow symbolic links listed on the command line + +       --dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir +              follow  each  command  line  symbolic  link  that +              points to a directory + +       --hide=PATTERN +              do not list implied entries matching  shell  PAT- +              TERN (overridden by -a or -A) + +       --indicator-style=WORD  append indicator with style WORD +       to entry names: +              none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p) + +       -i, --inode +              with -l, print the index number of each file + +       -I, --ignore=PATTERN +              do  not  list implied entries matching shell PAT- +              TERN + +       -k     like --block-size=1K + +       -l     use a long listing format + +       -L, --dereference +              when showing  file  information  for  a  symbolic +              link, show information for the file the link ref- +              erences rather than for the link itself + +       -m     fill width with a comma separated list of entries + +       -n, --numeric-uid-gid +              like -l, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs + +       -N, --literal +              print  raw  entry names (don't treat e.g. control +              characters specially) + +       -o     like -l, but do not list group information + +       -p, --file-type +              append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries + +       -q, --hide-control-chars +              print ? instead of non graphic characters + +       --show-control-chars +              show non graphic characters as-is (default unless +              program is `ls' and output is a terminal) + +       -Q, --quote-name +              enclose entry names in double quotes + +       --quoting-style=WORD +              use  quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, +              locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape + +       -r, --reverse +              reverse order while sorting + +       -R, --recursive +              list subdirectories recursively + +       -s, --size +              with -l, print size of each file, in blocks + +       -S     sort by file size + +       --sort=WORD +              extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t,  version +              -v,  status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use +              -u + +       --time=WORD +              with -l, show time as WORD instead  of  modifica- +              tion  time:  atime, access, use, ctime or status; +              use specified time as sort key if --sort=time + +       --time-style=STYLE +              with -l, show times using style STYLE:  full-iso, +              long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT.  FORMAT is inter- +              preted like `date';  if  FORMAT  is  FORMAT1<new- +              line>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to non-recent files +              and FORMAT2 to recent files; if STYLE is prefixed +              with  `posix-',  STYLE  takes effect only outside +              the POSIX locale + +       -t     sort by modification time + +       -T, --tabsize=COLS +              assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8 + +       -u     with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: +              show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort +              by access time + +       -U     do not sort; list entries in directory order + +       -v     sort by version + +       -w, --width=COLS +              assume screen width instead of current value + +       -x     list entries by lines instead of by columns + +       -X     sort alphabetically by entry extension + +       -1     list one file per line + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIZE may be (or may be an  integer  optionally  followed +       by)  one  of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M +       1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +       By default, color is not used to  distinguish  types  of +       files.  That is equivalent to using --color=none.  Using +       the --color option without the optional WHEN argument is +       equivalent  to using --color=always.  With --color=auto, +       color codes are output only if standard output  is  con- +       nected to a terminal (tty). + +       Exit  status is 0 if OK, 1 if minor problems, 2 if seri- +       ous trouble. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for ls is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  ls  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info ls + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +ls 5.3.0                 December 2004                    LS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/md5sum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/md5sum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ecd8d68 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/md5sum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +MD5SUM(1)                User Commands                MD5SUM(1) + + + + + +NAME +       md5sum - compute and check MD5 message digest + +SYNOPSIS +       md5sum [OPTION] [FILE]... +       md5sum [OPTION] --check [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print  or  check MD5 (128-bit) checksums.  With no FILE, +       or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +       -b, --binary +              read files in binary mode  (default  on  DOS/Win- +              dows) + +       -c, --check +              check MD5 sums against given list + +       -t, --text +              read files in text mode (default) + +   The  following  two  options  are useful only when verifying +       checksums: +       --status +              don't output anything, status code shows success + +       -w, --warn +              warn about improperly formated checksum lines + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       The sums are computed as described in  RFC  1321.   When +       checking,  the  input  should be a former output of this +       program.  The default mode  is  to  print  a  line  with +       checksum, a character indicating type (`*' for binary, ` +       ' for text), and name for each FILE. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Ulrich Drepper and Scott Miller. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for md5sum  is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the  info and md5sum programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info md5sum + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +md5sum 5.3.0             November 2004                MD5SUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkdir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkdir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb87537 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkdir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +MKDIR(1)                 User Commands                 MKDIR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       mkdir - make directories + +SYNOPSIS +       mkdir [OPTION] DIRECTORY... + +DESCRIPTION +       Create the DIRECTORY(ies), if they do not already exist. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -m, --mode=MODE +              set  permission mode (as in chmod), not rwxrwxrwx +              - umask + +       -p, --parents +              no error if existing, make parent directories  as +              needed + +       -v, --verbose +              print a message for each created directory + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for mkdir is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and mkdir programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info mkdir + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mkdir 5.3.0              November 2004                 MKDIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkfifo.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkfifo.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec00be3 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mkfifo.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +MKFIFO(1)                User Commands                MKFIFO(1) + + + + + +NAME +       mkfifo - make FIFOs (named pipes) + +SYNOPSIS +       mkfifo [OPTION] NAME... + +DESCRIPTION +       Create named pipes (FIFOs) with the given NAMEs. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -m, --mode=MODE +              set permission mode (as in  chmod),  not  a=rw  - +              umask + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for  mkfifo is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info  and  mkfifo  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info mkfifo + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mkfifo 5.3.0             November 2004                MKFIFO(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mknod.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mknod.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f494bbf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mknod.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +MKNOD(1)                 User Commands                 MKNOD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       mknod - make block or character special files + +SYNOPSIS +       mknod [OPTION]... NAME TYPE [MAJOR MINOR] + +DESCRIPTION +       Create the special file NAME of the given TYPE. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -m, --mode=MODE +              set permission mode (as in  chmod),  not  a=rw  - +              umask + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Both  MAJOR  and MINOR must be specified when TYPE is b, +       c, or u, and they must be omitted when TYPE  is  p.   If +       MAJOR  or  MINOR begins with 0x or 0X, it is interpreted +       as hexadecimal; otherwise,  if  it  begins  with  0,  as +       octal; otherwise, as decimal.  TYPE may be: + +       b      create a block (buffered) special file + +       c, u   create a character (unbuffered) special file + +       p      create a FIFO + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for mknod is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and mknod programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info mknod + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mknod 5.3.0              November 2004                 MKNOD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mv.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mv.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05c0293 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/mv.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +MV(1)                    User Commands                    MV(1) + + + + + +NAME +       mv - move (rename) files + +SYNOPSIS +       mv [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST +       mv [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY +       mv [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE... + +DESCRIPTION +       Rename SOURCE to DEST, or move SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       --backup[=CONTROL] +              make a backup of each existing destination file + +       -b     like --backup but does not accept an argument + +       -f, --force +              do not prompt before overwriting  (equivalent  to +              --reply=yes) + +       -i, --interactive +              prompt    before    overwrite    (equivalent   to +              --reply=query) + +       --reply={yes,no,query} +              specify how to handle the prompt about an  exist- +              ing destination file + +       --strip-trailing-slashes  remove  any  trailing  slashes +       from each SOURCE +              argument + +       -S, --suffix=SUFFIX +              override the usual backup suffix + +       -t, --target-directory=DIRECTORY +              move all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY + +       -T, --no-target-directory +              treat DEST as a normal file + +       -u, --update +              move  only when the SOURCE file is newer than the +              destination file or when the destination file  is +              missing + +       -v, --verbose +              explain what is being done + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       The  backup  suffix  is `~', unless set with --suffix or +       SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.  The version control method may be +       selected  via  the  --backup  option or through the VER- +       SION_CONTROL environment variable.  Here are the values: + +       none, off +              never make backups (even if --backup is given) + +       numbered, t +              make numbered backups + +       existing, nil +              numbered if numbered backups exist, simple other- +              wise + +       simple, never +              always make simple backups + +AUTHOR +       Written by Mike Parker, David MacKenzie, and Jim  Meyer- +       ing. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for mv is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  mv  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info mv + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +mv 5.3.0                 November 2004                    MV(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nice.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nice.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d41ac21 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nice.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +NICE(1)                  User Commands                  NICE(1) + + + + + +NAME +       nice - run a program with modified scheduling priority + +SYNOPSIS +       nice [OPTION] [COMMAND [ARG]...] + +DESCRIPTION +       Run  COMMAND  with an adjusted nice value, which affects +       the scheduling priority.  With  no  COMMAND,  print  the +       current  nice  value.   Nice values range from -20 (most +       favorable scheduling) to 19 (least favorable). + +       -n, --adjustment=N +              add integer N to the nice value (default 10) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for nice is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and nice programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info nice + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +nice 5.3.0               November 2004                  NICE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nl.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nl.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2baa72b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nl.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +NL(1)                    User Commands                    NL(1) + + + + + +NAME +       nl - number lines of files + +SYNOPSIS +       nl [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Write  each  FILE  to standard output, with line numbers +       added.  With no FILE, or when FILE is -,  read  standard +       input. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -b, --body-numbering=STYLE +              use STYLE for numbering body lines + +       -d, --section-delimiter=CC +              use CC for separating logical pages + +       -f, --footer-numbering=STYLE +              use STYLE for numbering footer lines + +       -h, --header-numbering=STYLE +              use STYLE for numbering header lines + +       -i, --page-increment=NUMBER +              line number increment at each line + +       -l, --join-blank-lines=NUMBER +              group of NUMBER empty lines counted as one + +       -n, --number-format=FORMAT +              insert line numbers according to FORMAT + +       -p, --no-renumber +              do not reset line numbers at logical pages + +       -s, --number-separator=STRING +              add STRING after (possible) line number + +       -v, --first-page=NUMBER +              first line number on each logical page + +       -w, --number-width=NUMBER +              use NUMBER columns for line numbers + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       By default, selects -v1 -i1 -l1 -sTAB -w6 -nrn  -hn  -bt +       -fn.   CC  are  two  delimiter characters for separating +       logical pages, a missing  second  character  implies  :. +       Type \\ for \.  STYLE is one of: + +       a      number all lines + +       t      number only nonempty lines + +       n      number no lines + +       pBRE   number  only  lines  that contain a match for the +              basic regular + +              expression, BRE + +       FORMAT is one of: + +       ln     left justified, no leading zeros + +       rn     right justified, no leading zeros + +       rz     right justified, leading zeros + +AUTHOR +       Written by Scott Bartram and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for nl is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  nl  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info nl + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +nl 5.3.0                 November 2004                    NL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nohup.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nohup.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a28728 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/nohup.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +NOHUP(1)                 User Commands                 NOHUP(1) + + + + + +NAME +       nohup  - run a command immune to hangups, with output to +       a non-tty + +SYNOPSIS +       nohup COMMAND [ARG]... +       nohup OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Run COMMAND, ignoring hangup signals. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for nohup is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and nohup programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info nohup + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +nohup 5.3.0              November 2004                 NOHUP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/od.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/od.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e73270 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/od.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +OD(1)                    User Commands                    OD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       od - dump files in octal and other formats + +SYNOPSIS +       od [OPTION]... [FILE]... +       od [-abcdfilosx]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b]] +       od  --traditional  [OPTION]...  [FILE]  [[+]OFFSET[.][b] +       [+][LABEL][.][b]] + +DESCRIPTION +       Write an  unambiguous  representation,  octal  bytes  by +       default, of FILE to standard output.  With more than one +       FILE argument, concatenate them in the listed  order  to +       form  the  input.  With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read +       standard input. + +       All arguments to long options are  mandatory  for  short +       options. + +       -A, --address-radix=RADIX +              decide how file offsets are printed + +       -j, --skip-bytes=BYTES +              skip BYTES input bytes first + +       -N, --read-bytes=BYTES +              limit dump to BYTES input bytes + +       -S, --strings[=BYTES] +              output strings of at least BYTES graphic chars + +       -t, --format=TYPE +              select output format or formats + +       -v, --output-duplicates +              do not use * to mark line suppression + +       -w, --width[=BYTES] +              output BYTES bytes per output line + +       --traditional +              accept arguments in traditional form + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +   Traditional  format  specifications  may be intermixed; they +       accumulate: +       -a     same as -t a,  select named characters + +       -b     same as -t o1, select octal bytes + +       -c     same as -t c,  select ASCII characters  or  back- +              slash escapes + +       -d     same  as  -t  u2,  select unsigned decimal 2-byte +              units + +       -f     same as -t fF, select floats + +       -i     same as -t dI, select decimal ints + +       -l     same as -t dL, select decimal longs + +       -o     same as -t o2, select octal 2-byte units + +       -s     same as -t d2, select decimal 2-byte units + +       -x     same as -t x2, select hexadecimal 2-byte units + +       If first and second call formats both apply, the  second +       format  is  assumed if the last operand begins with + or +       (if there are 2 operands) a digit.   An  OFFSET  operand +       means  -j  OFFSET.  LABEL is the pseudo-address at first +       byte printed, incremented when dump is progressing.  For +       OFFSET  and LABEL, a 0x or 0X prefix indicates hexadeci- +       mal; suffixes may be . for octal and b for  multiply  by +       512. + +       TYPE is made up of one or more of these specifications: + +       a      named character + +       c      ASCII character or backslash escape + +       d[SIZE] +              signed decimal, SIZE bytes per integer + +       f[SIZE] +              floating point, SIZE bytes per integer + +       o[SIZE] +              octal, SIZE bytes per integer + +       u[SIZE] +              unsigned decimal, SIZE bytes per integer + +       x[SIZE] +              hexadecimal, SIZE bytes per integer + +       SIZE  is a number.  For TYPE in doux, SIZE may also be C +       for sizeof(char), S for sizeof(short), I for sizeof(int) +       or L for sizeof(long).  If TYPE is f, SIZE may also be F +       for  sizeof(float),  D  for  sizeof(double)  or  L   for +       sizeof(long double). + +       RADIX  is  d for decimal, o for octal, x for hexadecimal +       or n for none.  BYTES is hexadecimal with 0x or 0X  pre- +       fix, it is multiplied by 512 with b suffix, by 1024 with +       k and by 1048576 with m.  Adding a z suffix to any  type +       adds  a  display  of  printable characters to the end of +       each line of output.  --string without a number  implies +       3.  --width without a number implies 32.  By default, od +       uses -A o -t d2 -w 16. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for od is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  od  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info od + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +od 5.3.0                 November 2004                    OD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/paste.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/paste.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..deb8194 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/paste.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +PASTE(1)                 User Commands                 PASTE(1) + + + + + +NAME +       paste - merge lines of files + +SYNOPSIS +       paste [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Write lines consisting of the sequentially corresponding +       lines from each FILE, separated  by  TABs,  to  standard +       output.   With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard +       input. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -d, --delimiters=LIST +              reuse characters from LIST instead of TABs + +       -s, --serial +              paste one file at a time instead of in parallel + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David M. Ihnat and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for paste is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and paste programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info paste + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +paste 5.3.0              November 2004                 PASTE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pathchk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pathchk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b023561 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pathchk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +PATHCHK(1)               User Commands               PATHCHK(1) + + + + + +NAME +       pathchk - check whether file names are valid or portable + +SYNOPSIS +       pathchk [OPTION]... NAME... + +DESCRIPTION +       Diagnose unportable constructs in NAME. + +       -p, --portability +              check for all POSIX systems, not only this one + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Paul Eggert, David MacKenzie, and Jim  Meyer- +       ing. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for pathchk is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and  pathchk  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info pathchk + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pathchk 5.3.0            November 2004               PATHCHK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pgawk.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pgawk.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a431e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pgawk.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1972 @@ +GAWK(1)                        Utility Commands                        GAWK(1) + + + +NAME +       gawk - pattern scanning and processing language + +SYNOPSIS +       gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ -- +       ] file ... +       gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ]  program-text +       file ... + +       pgawk  [  POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ +       -- ] file ... +       pgawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text +       file ... + +DESCRIPTION +       Gawk is the GNU Project's implementation of the AWK pro- +       gramming language.  It conforms to the definition of the +       language  in the POSIX 1003.1 Standard.  This version in +       turn is based on the description in The AWK  Programming +       Language,  by  Aho,  Kernighan, and Weinberger, with the +       additional features found in the System V Release 4 ver- +       sion  of  UNIX awk.  Gawk also provides more recent Bell +       Laboratories awk extensions, and a  number  of  GNU-spe- +       cific extensions. + +       Pgawk is the profiling version of gawk.  It is identical +       in every way to gawk,  except  that  programs  run  more +       slowly,  and it automatically produces an execution pro- +       file in the file awkprof.out when done.  See the  --pro- +       file option, below. + +       The command line consists of options to gawk itself, the +       AWK program text (if not supplied via the -f  or  --file +       options),  and  values  to be made available in the ARGC +       and ARGV pre-defined AWK variables. + +OPTION FORMAT +       Gawk options may be either traditional POSIX one  letter +       options, or GNU-style long options.  POSIX options start +       with a single "-", while long options start  with  "--". +       Long options are provided for both GNU-specific features +       and for POSIX-mandated features. + +       Following the POSIX standard, gawk-specific options  are +       supplied  via  arguments  to the -W option.  Multiple -W +       options may be supplied Each -W option has a correspond- +       ing  long  option, as detailed below.  Arguments to long +       options are either joined with the option by an =  sign, +       with  no  intervening spaces, or they may be provided in +       the next command line argument.   Long  options  may  be +       abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation remains unique. + +OPTIONS +       Gawk accepts the following options, listed by frequency. + +       -F fs +       --field-separator fs +              Use  fs  for the input field separator (the value +              of the FS predefined variable). + +       -v var=val +       --assign var=val +              Assign the value val to the variable var,  before +              execution  of  the program begins.  Such variable +              values are available to the BEGIN block of an AWK +              program. + +       -f program-file +       --file program-file +              Read  the  AWK  program source from the file pro- +              gram-file, instead of from the first command line +              argument.  Multiple -f (or --file) options may be +              used. + +       -mf NNN +       -mr NNN +              Set various memory limits to the value NNN.   The +              f flag sets the maximum number of fields, and the +              r flag sets the maximum record size.   These  two +              flags  and the -m option are from an earlier ver- +              sion of the Bell Laboratories research version of +              UNIX  awk.   They are ignored by gawk, since gawk +              has no pre-defined limits. + +       -W compat +       -W traditional +       --compat +       --traditional +              Run  in  compatibility  mode.   In  compatibility +              mode,  gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none +              of the GNU-specific  extensions  are  recognized. +              The  use  of  --traditional is preferred over the +              other forms of this option.  See GNU  EXTENSIONS, +              below, for more information. + +       -W copyleft +       -W copyright +       --copyleft +       --copyright +              Print  the  short  version  of  the GNU copyright +              information message on the  standard  output  and +              exit successfully. + +       -W dump-variables[=file] +       --dump-variables[=file] +              Print  a  sorted  list of global variables, their +              types and final values to file.  If  no  file  is +              provided,  gawk  uses a file named awkvars.out in +              the current directory. +              Having a list of all the global  variables  is  a +              good way to look for typographical errors in your +              programs.  You would also use this option if  you +              have a large program with a lot of functions, and +              you want to be sure  that  your  functions  don't +              inadvertently use global variables that you meant +              to be local.  (This is a particularly  easy  mis- +              take  to  make with simple variable names like i, +              j, and so on.) + +       -W exec file +       --exec file +              Similar to -f, however, this  is  option  is  the +              last  one processed.  This should be used with #! +              scripts, particularly for  CGI  applications,  to +              avoid  passing  in  options or source code (!) on +              the command line from a URL.   This  option  dis- +              ables command-line variable assignments. + +       -W gen-po +       --gen-po +              Scan  and  parse  the AWK program, and generate a +              GNU .po  format  file  on  standard  output  with +              entries  for  all localizable strings in the pro- +              gram.  The program itself is not  executed.   See +              the GNU gettext distribution for more information +              on .po files. + +       -W help +       -W usage +       --help +       --usage +              Print a relatively short summary of the available +              options  on  the  standard  output.  (Per the GNU +              Coding Standards, these options cause an  immedi- +              ate, successful exit.) + +       -W lint[=value] +       --lint[=value] +              Provide  warnings about constructs that are dubi- +              ous or non-portable to other AWK implementations. +              With an optional argument of fatal, lint warnings +              become fatal errors.  This may  be  drastic,  but +              its  use will certainly encourage the development +              of cleaner AWK programs.  With an optional  argu- +              ment  of invalid, only warnings about things that +              are actually invalid are  issued.  (This  is  not +              fully implemented yet.) + +       -W lint-old +       --lint-old +              Provide  warnings  about  constructs that are not +              portable to the original version of Unix awk. + +       -W non-decimal-data +       --non-decimal-data +              Recognize octal and hexadecimal values  in  input +              data.  Use this option with great caution! + +       -W posix +       --posix +              This  turns  on compatibility mode, with the fol- +              lowing additional restrictions: + +              · \x escape sequences are not recognized. + +              · Only space and tab act as field separators when +                FS  is set to a single space, newline does not. + +              · You cannot continue lines after ?  and :. + +              · The synonym func for the  keyword  function  is +                not recognized. + +              · The  operators  **  and  **=  cannot be used in +                place of ^ and ^=. + +              · The fflush() function is not available. + +       -W profile[=prof_file] +       --profile[=prof_file] +              Send profiling data to prof_file.  The default is +              awkprof.out.   When run with gawk, the profile is +              just a "pretty printed" version of  the  program. +              When  run with pgawk, the profile contains execu- +              tion counts of each statement in the  program  in +              the left margin and function call counts for each +              user-defined function. + +       -W re-interval +       --re-interval +              Enable the use of interval expressions in regular +              expression  matching  (see  Regular  Expressions, +              below).  Interval expressions were not tradition- +              ally  available  in  the AWK language.  The POSIX +              standard added them, to make awk and  egrep  con- +              sistent  with  each other.  However, their use is +              likely to break old AWK programs,  so  gawk  only +              provides  them  if  they  are requested with this +              option, or when --posix is specified. + +       -W source program-text +       --source program-text +              Use program-text  as  AWK  program  source  code. +              This   option  allows  the  easy  intermixing  of +              library functions (used via  the  -f  and  --file +              options)  with source code entered on the command +              line.  It is intended  primarily  for  medium  to +              large AWK programs used in shell scripts. + +       -W use-lc-numeric +       --use-lc-numeric +              This  forces  gawk  to  use  the locale's decimal +              point  character   when   parsing   input   data. +              Although  the POSIX standard requires this behav- +              ior, and gawk does so when --posix is in  effect, +              the default is to follow traditional behavior and +              use a  period  as  the  decimal  point,  even  in +              locales where the period is not the decimal point +              character.  This  option  overrides  the  default +              behavior,  without  the full draconian strictness +              of the --posix option. + +       -W version +       --version +              Print version  information  for  this  particular +              copy  of  gawk  on  the standard output.  This is +              useful mainly for knowing if the current copy  of +              gawk on your system is up to date with respect to +              whatever the Free  Software  Foundation  is  dis- +              tributing.   This  is  also useful when reporting +              bugs.   (Per  the  GNU  Coding  Standards,  these +              options cause an immediate, successful exit.) + +       --     Signal  the  end  of  options.  This is useful to +              allow further arguments to the AWK program itself +              to  start  with a "-".  This provides consistency +              with the argument parsing convention used by most +              other POSIX programs. +       In  compatibility mode, any other options are flagged as +       invalid, but are otherwise ignored.   In  normal  opera- +       tion, as long as program text has been supplied, unknown +       options are passed on to the AWK  program  in  the  ARGV +       array  for  processing.  This is particularly useful for +       running AWK programs via the "#!" executable interpreter +       mechanism. +AWK PROGRAM EXECUTION +       An  AWK program consists of a sequence of pattern-action +       statements and optional function definitions. +              pattern   { action statements } +              function name(parameter list) { statements } +       Gawk first reads the program source  from  the  program- +       file(s)  if  specified,  from  arguments to --source, or +       from the first non-option argument on the command  line. +       The  -f  and --source options may be used multiple times +       on the command line.  Gawk reads the program text as  if +       all  the program-files and command line source texts had +       been concatenated together.  This is useful for building +       libraries  of  AWK  functions, without having to include +       them in each new AWK program that uses  them.   It  also +       provides  the ability to mix library functions with com- +       mand line programs. +       The environment variable AWKPATH specifies a search path +       to  use  when  finding  source  files  named with the -f +       option.  If this variable does not  exist,  the  default +       path is ".:/usr/local/share/awk".  (The actual directory +       may  vary,  depending  upon  how  gawk  was  built   and +       installed.)   If a file name given to the -f option con- +       tains a "/" character, no path search is performed. +       Gawk executes  AWK  programs  in  the  following  order. +       First,  all  variable  assignments  specified via the -v +       option are performed.  Next, gawk compiles  the  program +       into  an internal form.  Then, gawk executes the code in +       the BEGIN block(s) (if any), and then proceeds  to  read +       each  file  named  in  the  ARGV array.  If there are no +       files named on the command line, gawk reads the standard +       input. +       If  a  filename on the command line has the form var=val +       it is treated as a variable  assignment.   The  variable +       var will be assigned the value val.  (This happens after +       any BEGIN block(s) have been run.)  Command  line  vari- +       able assignment is most useful for dynamically assigning +       values to the variables AWK uses to control how input is +       broken  into  fields and records.  It is also useful for +       controlling state if multiple passes are needed  over  a +       single data file. +       If  the  value  of a particular element of ARGV is empty +       (""), gawk skips over it. +       For each record in the input, gawk tests to  see  if  it +       matches  any  pattern in the AWK program.  For each pat- +       tern that the record matches, the associated  action  is +       executed.   The  patterns  are  tested in the order they +       occur in the program. +       Finally, after all the input is exhausted, gawk executes +       the code in the END block(s) (if any). +VARIABLES, RECORDS AND FIELDS +       AWK variables are dynamic; they come into existence when +       they are first used.  Their values are either  floating- +       point  numbers  or  strings, or both, depending upon how +       they are used.  AWK also  has  one  dimensional  arrays; +       arrays  with multiple dimensions may be simulated.  Sev- +       eral pre-defined variables are set as  a  program  runs; +       these are described as needed and summarized below. +   Records +       Normally,  records  are separated by newline characters. +       You can control how records are separated  by  assigning +       values to the built-in variable RS.  If RS is any single +       character, that character separates records.  Otherwise, +       RS  is  a  regular  expression.   Text in the input that +       matches this regular expression  separates  the  record. +       However, in compatibility mode, only the first character +       of its string value is used for separating records.   If +       RS is set to the null string, then records are separated +       by blank lines.  When RS is set to the null string,  the +       newline  character  always acts as a field separator, in +       addition to whatever value FS may have. +   Fields +       As each input record is read,  gawk  splits  the  record +       into  fields,  using the value of the FS variable as the +       field separator.  If FS is a  single  character,  fields +       are  separated  by  that  character.   If FS is the null +       string, then each individual character becomes  a  sepa- +       rate field.  Otherwise, FS is expected to be a full reg- +       ular expression.  In the special case that FS is a  sin- +       gle space, fields are separated by runs of spaces and/or +       tabs and/or newlines.  (But see the section  POSIX  COM- +       PATIBILITY,  below).  NOTE: The value of IGNORECASE (see +       below) also affects how fields are split when  FS  is  a +       regular  expression,  and how records are separated when +       RS is a regular expression. +       If the FIELDWIDTHS variable is set to a space  separated +       list  of  numbers,  each field is expected to have fixed +       width, and gawk splits up the record using the specified +       widths.   The  value  of FS is ignored.  Assigning a new +       value to  FS  overrides  the  use  of  FIELDWIDTHS,  and +       restores the default behavior. +       Each  field in the input record may be referenced by its +       position, $1, $2, and so on.  $0 is  the  whole  record. +       Fields need not be referenced by constants: +              n = 5 +              print $n +       prints the fifth field in the input record. +       The  variable NF is set to the total number of fields in +       the input record. +       References to non-existent  fields  (i.e.  fields  after +       $NF)  produce  the null-string.  However, assigning to a +       non-existent field (e.g., $(NF+2)  =  5)  increases  the +       value  of  NF,  creates  any intervening fields with the +       null string as their value, and causes the value  of  $0 +       to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by the +       value of OFS.  References to  negative  numbered  fields +       cause  a fatal error.  Decrementing NF causes the values +       of fields past the new value to be lost, and  the  value +       of  $0 to be recomputed, with the fields being separated +       by the value of OFS. +       Assigning a value to an existing field causes the  whole +       record  to be rebuilt when $0 is referenced.  Similarly, +       assigning a value to $0 causes the record to be resplit, +       creating new values for the fields. +   Built-in Variables +       Gawk's built-in variables are: +       ARGC        The  number  of command line arguments (does +                   not include options to gawk, or the  program +                   source). +       ARGIND      The  index in ARGV of the current file being +                   processed. +       ARGV        Array of command line arguments.  The  array +                   is  indexed from 0 to ARGC - 1.  Dynamically +                   changing the contents of  ARGV  can  control +                   the files used for data. +       BINMODE     On   non-POSIX  systems,  specifies  use  of +                   "binary" mode for  all  file  I/O.   Numeric +                   values  of  1,  2,  or 3, specify that input +                   files, output files, or all  files,  respec- +                   tively,  should use binary I/O.  String val- +                   ues of "r", or "w" specify that input files, +                   or  output  files,  respectively, should use +                   binary I/O.  String values of "rw"  or  "wr" +                   specify  that  all  files  should use binary +                   I/O.  Any other string value is  treated  as +                   "rw", but generates a warning message. +       CONVFMT     The  conversion  format for numbers, "%.6g", +                   by default. +       ENVIRON     An array containing the values of  the  cur- +                   rent  environment.   The array is indexed by +                   the  environment  variables,  each   element +                   being the value of that variable (e.g., ENV- +                   IRON["HOME"] might be /home/arnold).  Chang- +                   ing  this array does not affect the environ- +                   ment seen by programs which gawk spawns  via +                   redirection or the system() function. +       ERRNO       If  a  system  error  occurs  either doing a +                   redirection for getline, during a  read  for +                   getline,  or  during  a  close(), then ERRNO +                   will contain a string describing the  error. +                   The  value is subject to translation in non- +                   English locales. +       FIELDWIDTHS A white-space separated list of fieldwidths. +                   When  set, gawk parses the input into fields +                   of fixed width, instead of using  the  value +                   of the FS variable as the field separator. +       FILENAME    The  name  of the current input file.  If no +                   files are specified on the command line, the +                   value of FILENAME is "-".  However, FILENAME +                   is undefined inside the BEGIN block  (unless +                   set by getline). +       FNR         The input record number in the current input +                   file. +       FS          The  input  field  separator,  a  space   by +                   default.  See Fields, above. +       IGNORECASE  Controls the case-sensitivity of all regular +                   expression  and   string   operations.    If +                   IGNORECASE has a non-zero value, then string +                   comparisons and pattern matching  in  rules, +                   field  splitting  with FS, record separating +                   with RS, regular expression matching with  ~ +                   and  !~,  and the gensub(), gsub(), index(), +                   match(), split(), and sub()  built-in  func- +                   tions  all  ignore  case  when doing regular +                   expression  operations.   NOTE:  Array  sub- +                   scripting  is  not  affected.   However, the +                   asort() and asorti() functions are affected. +                   Thus,  if  IGNORECASE  is not equal to zero, +                   /aB/ matches all of the strings "ab",  "aB", +                   "Ab",  and "AB".  As with all AWK variables, +                   the initial value of IGNORECASE is zero,  so +                   all regular expression and string operations +                   are normally  case-sensitive.   Under  Unix, +                   the full ISO 8859-1 Latin-1 character set is +                   used when ignoring case.  As of gawk  3.1.4, +                   the  case  equivalencies  are  fully locale- +                   aware, based on the C  <ctype.h>  facilities +                   such as isalpha(), and toupper(). +       LINT        Provides   dynamic  control  of  the  --lint +                   option from within  an  AWK  program.   When +                   true, gawk prints lint warnings. When false, +                   it does not.  When assigned the string value +                   "fatal",  lint warnings become fatal errors, +                   exactly like --lint=fatal.  Any  other  true +                   value just prints warnings. +       NF          The  number  of  fields in the current input +                   record. +       NR          The total number of input  records  seen  so +                   far. +       OFMT        The  output  format  for numbers, "%.6g", by +                   default. +       OFS         The  output  field  separator,  a  space  by +                   default. +       ORS         The  output  record  separator, by default a +                   newline. +       PROCINFO    The elements of this array provide access to +                   information  about  the running AWK program. +                   On some systems, there may  be  elements  in +                   the  array,  "group1"  through  "groupn" for +                   some n, which is the number of supplementary +                   groups  that  the  process  has.  Use the in +                   operator to test for  these  elements.   The +                   following  elements  are  guaranteed  to  be +                   available: +                   PROCINFO["egid"]   the value  of  the  gete- +                                      gid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["euid"]   the    value    of    the +                                      geteuid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["FS"]     "FS" if  field  splitting +                                      with  FS is in effect, or +                                      "FIELDWIDTHS"  if   field +                                      splitting   with   FIELD- +                                      WIDTHS is in effect. +                   PROCINFO["gid"]    the  value  of  the  get- +                                      gid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["pgrpid"] the  process  group ID of +                                      the current process. +                   PROCINFO["pid"]    the  process  ID  of  the +                                      current process. +                   PROCINFO["ppid"]   the  parent process ID of +                                      the current process. +                   PROCINFO["uid"]    the    value    of    the +                                      getuid(2) system call. +                   PROCINFO["version"] +                                      The   version   of  gawk. +                                      This  is  available  from +                                      version  3.1.4 and later. +       RS          The input record  separator,  by  default  a +                   newline. +       RT          The  record terminator.  Gawk sets RT to the +                   input text that  matched  the  character  or +                   regular expression specified by RS. +       RSTART      The  index of the first character matched by +                   match(); 0 if no match.  (This implies  that +                   character indices start at one.) +       RLENGTH     The length of the string matched by match(); +                   -1 if no match. +       SUBSEP      The character used to separate multiple sub- +                   scripts   in   array  elements,  by  default +                   "\034". +       TEXTDOMAIN  The text domain of the AWK program; used  to +                   find the localized translations for the pro- +                   gram's strings. +   Arrays +       Arrays are subscripted with an expression between square +       brackets  ([ and ]).  If the expression is an expression +       list (expr, expr ...)  then the  array  subscript  is  a +       string  consisting  of the concatenation of the (string) +       value of each expression, separated by the value of  the +       SUBSEP variable.  This facility is used to simulate mul- +       tiply dimensioned arrays.  For example: +              i = "A"; j = "B"; k = "C" +              x[i, j, k] = "hello, world\n" +       assigns the string "hello, world\n" to  the  element  of +       the   array   x   which   is   indexed   by  the  string +       "A\034B\034C".  All arrays in AWK are associative,  i.e. +       indexed by string values. +       The  special operator in may be used to test if an array +       has an index consisting of a particular value. +              if (val in array) +                   print array[val] +       If the array has multiple  subscripts,  use  (i,  j)  in +       array. +       The in construct may also be used in a for loop to iter- +       ate over all the elements of an array. +       An element may be deleted from an array using the delete +       statement.   The  delete  statement  may also be used to +       delete the entire contents of an array, just by specify- +       ing the array name without a subscript. +   Variable Typing And Conversion +       Variables and fields may be (floating point) numbers, or +       strings, or both.  How the value of a variable is inter- +       preted  depends  upon its context.  If used in a numeric +       expression, it will be treated as a number; if used as a +       string it will be treated as a string. +       To  force a variable to be treated as a number, add 0 to +       it; to force it to be treated as a  string,  concatenate +       it with the null string. +       When a string must be converted to a number, the conver- +       sion is accomplished using strtod(3).  A number is  con- +       verted  to  a  string by using the value of CONVFMT as a +       format string for sprintf(3), with the numeric value  of +       the  variable as the argument.  However, even though all +       numbers in AWK are floating-point, integral  values  are +       always converted as integers.  Thus, given +              CONVFMT = "%2.2f" +              a = 12 +              b = a "" +       the  variable  b  has  a  string  value  of "12" and not +       "12.00". +       When operating in POSIX mode (such as with  the  --posix +       command  line  option),  beware that locale settings may +       interfere with the way decimal numbers are treated:  the +       decimal separator of the numbers you are feeding to gawk +       must conform to what your locale would expect, be  it  a +       comma (,) or a period (.). +       Gawk  performs  comparisons as follows: If two variables +       are numeric, they  are  compared  numerically.   If  one +       value  is  numeric and the other has a string value that +       is a "numeric string," then comparisons  are  also  done +       numerically.   Otherwise, the numeric value is converted +       to a string and a string comparison is  performed.   Two +       strings are compared, of course, as strings. +       Note  that  string  constants,  such  as  "57",  are not +       numeric strings, they are string constants.  The idea of +       "numeric  string" only applies to fields, getline input, +       FILENAME, ARGV elements, ENVIRON elements and  the  ele- +       ments  of  an  array created by split() that are numeric +       strings.  The basic idea is that user  input,  and  only +       user  input,  that looks numeric, should be treated that +       way. +       Uninitialized variables have the numeric value 0 and the +       string value "" (the null, or empty, string). +   Octal and Hexadecimal Constants +       Starting  with version 3.1 of gawk , you may use C-style +       octal and hexadecimal  constants  in  your  AWK  program +       source  code.  For example, the octal value 011 is equal +       to decimal 9, and the hexadecimal value 0x11 is equal to +       decimal 17. +   String Constants +       String  constants  in  AWK  are  sequences of characters +       enclosed between double  quotes  (").   Within  strings, +       certain escape sequences are recognized, as in C.  These +       are: +       \\   A literal backslash. +       \a   The "alert" character; usually the ASCII BEL  char- +            acter. +       \b   backspace. +       \f   form-feed. +       \n   newline. +       \r   carriage return. +       \t   horizontal tab. +       \v   vertical tab. +       \xhex digits +            The character represented by the string of hexadec- +            imal digits following the \x.  As in  ANSI  C,  all +            following hexadecimal digits are considered part of +            the escape sequence.  (This feature should tell  us +            something  about  language  design  by  committee.) +            E.g., "\x1B" is the ASCII ESC (escape) character. +       \ddd The character represented by the 1-, 2-, or 3-digit +            sequence  of  octal  digits.   E.g.,  "\033" is the +            ASCII ESC (escape) character. +       \c   The literal character c. +       The escape sequences may also be  used  inside  constant +       regular   expressions   (e.g.,  /[ \t\f\n\r\v]/  matches +       whitespace characters). +       In compatibility mode,  the  characters  represented  by +       octal  and hexadecimal escape sequences are treated lit- +       erally when used in regular expression constants.  Thus, +       /a\52b/ is equivalent to /a\*b/. +PATTERNS AND ACTIONS +       AWK  is  a  line-oriented  language.   The pattern comes +       first, and  then  the  action.   Action  statements  are +       enclosed in { and }.  Either the pattern may be missing, +       or the action may be missing, but, of course, not  both. +       If  the  pattern  is missing, the action is executed for +       every single record  of  input.   A  missing  action  is +       equivalent to +              { print } +       which prints the entire record. +       Comments  begin  with  the  "#"  character, and continue +       until the end of the line.  Blank lines may be  used  to +       separate  statements.  Normally, a statement ends with a +       newline, however, this is not the case for lines  ending +       in  a  ",",  {,  ?, :, &&, or ||.  Lines ending in do or +       else also have their statements automatically  continued +       on  the  following  line.  In other cases, a line can be +       continued by ending it with a "\",  in  which  case  the +       newline will be ignored. +       Multiple statements may be put on one line by separating +       them with a ";".  This applies to  both  the  statements +       within  the  action  part  of a pattern-action pair (the +       usual case), and to the pattern-action statements  them- +       selves. +   Patterns +       AWK patterns may be one of the following: +              BEGIN +              END +              /regular expression/ +              relational expression +              pattern && pattern +              pattern || pattern +              pattern ? pattern : pattern +              (pattern) +              ! pattern +              pattern1, pattern2 +       BEGIN  and  END  are two special kinds of patterns which +       are not tested against the input.  The action  parts  of +       all  BEGIN  patterns are merged as if all the statements +       had been written in a single BEGIN block.  They are exe- +       cuted  before  any of the input is read.  Similarly, all +       the END blocks are merged, and  executed  when  all  the +       input  is  exhausted  (or when an exit statement is exe- +       cuted).  BEGIN and END patterns cannot be combined  with +       other  patterns  in  pattern expressions.  BEGIN and END +       patterns cannot have missing action parts. +       For /regular expression/ patterns, the associated state- +       ment  is executed for each input record that matches the +       regular expression.  Regular expressions are the same as +       those in egrep(1), and are summarized below. +       A  relational  expression  may  use any of the operators +       defined below in the section on actions.   These  gener- +       ally  test  whether certain fields match certain regular +       expressions. +       The &&, ||, and !  operators are  logical  AND,  logical +       OR,  and  logical  NOT,  respectively, as in C.  They do +       short-circuit evaluation, also as in C, and are used for +       combining  more  primitive  pattern  expressions.  As in +       most languages, parentheses may be used  to  change  the +       order of evaluation. +       The  ?: operator is like the same operator in C.  If the +       first pattern is true then the pattern used for  testing +       is  the second pattern, otherwise it is the third.  Only +       one of the second and third patterns is evaluated. +       The pattern1, pattern2 form of an expression is called a +       range  pattern.   It  matches all input records starting +       with a record  that  matches  pattern1,  and  continuing +       until  a  record  that  matches pattern2, inclusive.  It +       does not combine with any other sort of pattern  expres- +       sion. +   Regular Expressions +       Regular  expressions  are  the  extended  kind  found in +       egrep.  They are composed of characters as follows: +       c          matches the non-metacharacter c. +       \c         matches the literal character c. +       .          matches any character including newline. +       ^          matches the beginning of a string. +       $          matches the end of a string. +       [abc...]   character list, matches any of the characters +                  abc.... +       [^abc...]  negated character list, matches any character +                  except abc.... +       r1|r2      alternation: matches either r1 or r2. +       r1r2       concatenation: matches r1, and then r2. +       r+         matches one or more r's. +       r*         matches zero or more r's. +       r?         matches zero or one r's. +       (r)        grouping: matches r. +       r{n} +       r{n,} +       r{n,m}     One or two numbers inside  braces  denote  an +                  interval  expression.  If there is one number +                  in the braces, the preceding regular  expres- +                  sion r is repeated n times.  If there are two +                  numbers separated by a comma, r is repeated n +                  to  m times.  If there is one number followed +                  by a comma, then r is  repeated  at  least  n +                  times. +                  Interval  expressions  are  only available if +                  either --posix or --re-interval is  specified +                  on the command line. + +       \y         matches the empty string at either the begin- +                  ning or the end of a word. + +       \B         matches the empty string within a word. + +       \<         matches the empty string at the beginning  of +                  a word. + +       \>         matches  the  empty  string  at  the end of a +                  word. + +       \w         matches any word-constituent character  (let- +                  ter, digit, or underscore). + +       \W         matches  any  character that is not word-con- +                  stituent. + +       \`         matches the empty string at the beginning  of +                  a buffer (string). + +       \'         matches  the  empty  string  at  the end of a +                  buffer. + +       The escape sequences that are valid in string  constants +       (see below) are also valid in regular expressions. + +       Character  classes are a feature introduced in the POSIX +       standard.  A character class is a special  notation  for +       describing  lists  of  characters  that  have a specific +       attribute, but where the  actual  characters  themselves +       can  vary  from country to country and/or from character +       set to character set.  For example, the notion  of  what +       is  an  alphabetic  character  differs in the USA and in +       France. + +       A character class is only valid in a regular  expression +       inside  the  brackets  of  a  character list.  Character +       classes consist of [:, a keyword denoting the class, and +       :].  The character classes defined by the POSIX standard +       are: + +       [:alnum:]  Alphanumeric characters. + +       [:alpha:]  Alphabetic characters. + +       [:blank:]  Space or tab characters. + +       [:cntrl:]  Control characters. + +       [:digit:]  Numeric characters. + +       [:graph:]  Characters that are both printable and  visi- +                  ble.  (A space is printable, but not visible, +                  while an a is both.) + +       [:lower:]  Lower-case alphabetic characters. + +       [:print:]  Printable characters (characters that are not +                  control characters.) + +       [:punct:]  Punctuation  characters  (characters that are +                  not letter, digits,  control  characters,  or +                  space characters). + +       [:space:]  Space  characters  (such  as  space, tab, and +                  formfeed, to name a few). + +       [:upper:]  Upper-case alphabetic characters. + +       [:xdigit:] Characters that are hexadecimal digits. + +       For  example,  before  the  POSIX  standard,  to   match +       alphanumeric  characters,  you  would  have had to write +       /[A-Za-z0-9]/.  If your character set had  other  alpha- +       betic  characters  in it, this would not match them, and +       if your character set collated differently  from  ASCII, +       this might not even match the ASCII alphanumeric charac- +       ters.  With the POSIX character classes, you  can  write +       /[[:alnum:]]/,  and  this  matches  the  alphabetic  and +       numeric characters in your character set, no matter what +       it is. + +       Two additional special sequences can appear in character +       lists.  These apply to non-ASCII character  sets,  which +       can have single symbols (called collating elements) that +       are represented with more than one character, as well as +       several characters that are equivalent for collating, or +       sorting, purposes.  (E.g., in French, a plain "e" and  a +       grave-accented "`" are equivalent.) + +       Collating Symbols +              A collating symbol is a multi-character collating +              element enclosed in [.  and .].  For example,  if +              ch  is  a  collating element, then [[.ch.]]  is a +              regular expression that  matches  this  collating +              element,  while [ch] is a regular expression that +              matches either c or h. + +       Equivalence Classes +              An equivalence class is  a  locale-specific  name +              for  a  list  of  characters that are equivalent. +              The name is enclosed in [= and =].  For  example, +              the name e might be used to represent all of "e," +              "´," and "`."  In this case, [[=e=]] is a regular +              expression that matches any of e, ´, or `. + +       These features are very valuable in non-English speaking +       locales.  The library functions that gawk uses for regu- +       lar  expression  matching currently only recognize POSIX +       character classes; they do not recognize collating  sym- +       bols or equivalence classes. + +       The  \y,  \B,  \<,  \>, \w, \W, \`, and \' operators are +       specific to gawk; they are extensions based  on  facili- +       ties in the GNU regular expression libraries. + +       The various command line options control how gawk inter- +       prets characters in regular expressions. + +       No options +              In the default case, gawk provide all the facili- +              ties  of  POSIX  regular  expressions and the GNU +              regular  expression  operators  described  above. +              However,  interval expressions are not supported. + +       --posix +              Only POSIX regular expressions are supported, the +              GNU operators are not special.  (E.g., \w matches +              a literal w).  Interval expressions are  allowed. + +       --traditional +              Traditional  Unix  awk  regular  expressions  are +              matched.  The  GNU  operators  are  not  special, +              interval  expressions are not available, and nei- +              ther are the POSIX character classes ([[:alnum:]] +              and  so  on).   Characters described by octal and +              hexadecimal escape sequences are  treated  liter- +              ally,  even  if they represent regular expression +              metacharacters. + +       --re-interval +              Allow interval  expressions  in  regular  expres- +              sions, even if --traditional has been provided. + +   Actions +       Action  statements  are  enclosed  in  braces,  { and }. +       Action statements consist of the usual assignment,  con- +       ditional,  and  looping  statements  found  in most lan- +       guages.   The   operators,   control   statements,   and +       input/output  statements  available  are patterned after +       those in C. + +   Operators +       The operators in AWK, in order of decreasing precedence, +       are + + +       (...)       Grouping + +       $           Field reference. + +       ++ --       Increment  and  decrement,  both  prefix and +                   postfix. + +       ^           Exponentiation (** may also be used, and **= +                   for the assignment operator). + +       + - !       Unary  plus,  unary minus, and logical nega- +                   tion. + +       * / %       Multiplication, division, and modulus. + +       + -         Addition and subtraction. + +       space       String concatenation. + +       | |&        Piped I/O for getline, print, and printf. + +       < > +       <= >= +       != ==       The regular relational operators. + +       ~ !~        Regular  expression  match,  negated  match. +                   NOTE:  Do not use a constant regular expres- +                   sion (/foo/) on the left-hand side of a ~ or +                   !~.   Only  use  one on the right-hand side. +                   The expression /foo/  ~  exp  has  the  same +                   meaning  as  (($0  ~ /foo/) ~ exp).  This is +                   usually not what was intended. + +       in          Array membership. + +       &&          Logical AND. + +       ||          Logical OR. + +       ?:          The C conditional expression.  This has  the +                   form  expr1  ?  expr2  : expr3.  If expr1 is +                   true, the value of the expression is  expr2, +                   otherwise  it  is  expr3.  Only one of expr2 +                   and expr3 is evaluated. + +       = += -= +       *= /= %= ^= Assignment.  Both absolute assignment (var = +                   value)  and  operator-assignment  (the other +                   forms) are supported. + +   Control Statements +       The control statements are as follows: + +              if (condition) statement [ else statement ] +              while (condition) statement +              do statement while (condition) +              for (expr1; expr2; expr3) statement +              for (var in array) statement +              break +              continue +              delete array[index] +              delete array +              exit [ expression ] +              { statements } + +   I/O Statements +       The input/output statements are as follows: + + +       close(file [, how])   Close file,  pipe  or  co-process. +                             The  optional  how  should only be +                             used when closing  one  end  of  a +                             two-way  pipe to a co-process.  It +                             must be  a  string  value,  either +                             "to" or "from". + +       getline               Set $0 from next input record; set +                             NF, NR, FNR. + +       getline <file         Set $0 from next record  of  file; +                             set NF. + +       getline var           Set  var  from  next input record; +                             set NR, FNR. + +       getline var <file     Set var from next record of  file. + +       command | getline [var] +                             Run   command  piping  the  output +                             either into $0 or var, as above. + +       command |& getline [var] +                             Run command as a co-process piping +                             the  output either into $0 or var, +                             as above.  Co-processes are a gawk +                             extension.  (command can also be a +                             socket.  See the  subsection  Spe- +                             cial File Names, below.) + +       next                  Stop  processing the current input +                             record.  The next input record  is +                             read  and  processing  starts over +                             with the first pattern in the  AWK +                             program.   If the end of the input +                             data is reached, the END block(s), +                             if any, are executed. + +       nextfile              Stop  processing the current input +                             file.  The next input record  read +                             comes  from  the  next input file. +                             FILENAME and ARGIND  are  updated, +                             FNR  is reset to 1, and processing +                             starts over with the first pattern +                             in  the AWK program. If the end of +                             the input data is reached, the END +                             block(s), if any, are executed. + +       print                 Prints  the  current  record.  The +                             output record is  terminated  with +                             the value of the ORS variable. + +       print expr-list       Prints  expressions.  Each expres- +                             sion is separated by the value  of +                             the   OFS  variable.   The  output +                             record  is  terminated  with   the +                             value of the ORS variable. + +       print expr-list >file Prints  expressions on file.  Each +                             expression  is  separated  by  the +                             value  of  the  OFS variable.  The +                             output record is  terminated  with +                             the value of the ORS variable. + +       printf fmt, expr-list Format and print. + +       printf fmt, expr-list >file +                             Format and print on file. + +       system(cmd-line)      Execute  the command cmd-line, and +                             return the exit status.  (This may +                             not be available on non-POSIX sys- +                             tems.) + +       fflush([file])        Flush any buffers associated  with +                             the open output file or pipe file. +                             If file is missing, then  standard +                             output is flushed.  If file is the +                             null string, then all open  output +                             files and pipes have their buffers +                             flushed. + +       Additional output redirections are allowed for print and +       printf. + +       print ... >> file +              Appends output to the file. + +       print ... | command +              Writes on a pipe. + +       print ... |& command +              Sends  data to a co-process or socket.  (See also +              the subsection Special File Names, below.) + +       The getline command returns 0 on end of file and  -1  on +       an  error.   Upon  an  error,  ERRNO  contains  a string +       describing the problem. + +       NOTE: If using a pipe, co-process, or socket to getline, +       or  from  print  or  printf  within a loop, you must use +       close() to  create  new  instances  of  the  command  or +       socket.   AWK  does not automatically close pipes, sock- +       ets, or co-processes when they return EOF. + +   The printf Statement +       The AWK versions of the printf statement  and  sprintf() +       function  (see  below)  accept  the following conversion +       specification formats: + +       %c      An ASCII character.  If the argument used for %c +               is  numeric,  it  is  treated as a character and +               printed.  Otherwise, the argument is assumed  to +               be  a  string,  and  the only first character of +               that string is printed. + +       %d, %i  A decimal number (the integer part). + +       %e, %E  A   floating   point   number   of   the    form +               [-]d.dddddde[+-]dd.    The   %E  format  uses  E +               instead of e. + +       %f, %F  A   floating   point   number   of   the    form +               [-]ddd.dddddd.   If  the system library supports +               it, %F is available as well. This  is  like  %f, +               but uses capital letters for special "not a num- +               ber" and "infinity" values. If %F is not  avail- +               able, gawk uses %f. + +       %g, %G  Use  %e  or %f conversion, whichever is shorter, +               with nonsignificant zeros  suppressed.   The  %G +               format uses %E instead of %e. + +       %o      An unsigned octal number (also an integer). + +       %u      An  unsigned decimal number (again, an integer). + +       %s      A character string. + +       %x, %X  An unsigned  hexadecimal  number  (an  integer). +               The %X format uses ABCDEF instead of abcdef. + +       %%      A  single % character; no argument is converted. + +       NOTE: When using the integer format-control letters  for +       values  that  are outside the range of a C long integer, +       gawk switches to the %0f format specifier. If --lint  is +       provided  on  the  command  line  gawk warns about this. +       Other versions of awk may print  invalid  values  or  do +       something else entirely. + +       Optional,  additional  parameters  may lie between the % +       and the control letter: + +       count$ Use the count'th argument at this  point  in  the +              formatting.   This  is called a positional speci- +              fier and is intended primarily for use in  trans- +              lated  versions  of  format  strings,  not in the +              original text of an AWK program.  It  is  a  gawk +              extension. + +       -      The  expression  should  be left-justified within +              its field. + +       space  For numeric conversions, prefix  positive  values +              with  a  space,  and negative values with a minus +              sign. + +       +      The plus sign, used  before  the  width  modifier +              (see  below),  says  to  always supply a sign for +              numeric conversions, even if the data to be  for- +              matted  is  positive.   The + overrides the space +              modifier. + +       #      Use an "alternate form" for certain control  let- +              ters.   For  %o,  supply a leading zero.  For %x, +              and %X, supply a leading 0x or 0X for  a  nonzero +              result.  For %e, %E, %f and %F, the result always +              contains a decimal point.  For %g, and %G, trail- +              ing zeros are not removed from the result. + +       0      A leading 0 (zero) acts as a flag, that indicates +              output should be padded with  zeroes  instead  of +              spaces.   This applies even to non-numeric output +              formats.  This flag only has an effect  when  the +              field  width  is  wider  than  the  value  to  be +              printed. + +       width  The field should be padded to  this  width.   The +              field  is  normally padded with spaces.  If the 0 +              flag has been used, it is padded with zeroes. + +       .prec  A number that specifies the precision to use when +              printing.   For  the  %e, %E, %f and %F, formats, +              this specifies the  number  of  digits  you  want +              printed  to  the right of the decimal point.  For +              the %g, and %G formats, it specifies the  maximum +              number  of  significant  digits.  For the %d, %o, +              %i, %u, %x, and %X formats, it specifies the min- +              imum number of digits to print.  For %s, it spec- +              ifies the maximum number of characters  from  the +              string that should be printed. + +       The  dynamic  width  and prec capabilities of the ANSI C +       printf() routines are supported.  A * in place of either +       the  width or prec specifications causes their values to +       be taken from the argument list to printf or  sprintf(). +       To  use  a  positional specifier with a dynamic width or +       precision, supply the count$ after the * in  the  format +       string.  For example, "%3$*2$.*1$s". + +   Special File Names +       When  doing  I/O redirection from either print or printf +       into a file, or via getline from a file, gawk recognizes +       certain  special  filenames internally.  These filenames +       allow access to open  file  descriptors  inherited  from +       gawk's  parent  process (usually the shell).  These file +       names may also be used on the command line to name  data +       files.  The filenames are: + +       /dev/stdin  The standard input. + +       /dev/stdout The standard output. + +       /dev/stderr The standard error output. + +       /dev/fd/n   The  file  associated  with  the  open  file +                   descriptor n. + +       These are particularly useful for error  messages.   For +       example: + +              print "You blew it!" > "/dev/stderr" + +       whereas you would otherwise have to use + +              print "You blew it!" | "cat 1>&2" + +       The  following special filenames may be used with the |& +       co-process operator for creating TCP/IP network  connec- +       tions. + +       /inet/tcp/lport/rhost/rport  File  for TCP/IP connection +                                    on  local  port  lport   to +                                    remote host rhost on remote +                                    port rport.  Use a port  of +                                    0 to have the system pick a +                                    port. + +       /inet/udp/lport/rhost/rport  Similar,  but  use   UDP/IP +                                    instead of TCP/IP. + +       /inet/raw/lport/rhost/rport  Reserved for future use. + +       Other  special  filenames  provide access to information +       about the running gawk process.  These filenames are now +       obsolete.  Use the PROCINFO array to obtain the informa- +       tion they provide.  The filenames are: + +       /dev/pid    Reading this file returns the process ID  of +                   the  current process, in decimal, terminated +                   with a newline. + +       /dev/ppid   Reading this file returns the parent process +                   ID  of the current process, in decimal, ter- +                   minated with a newline. + +       /dev/pgrpid Reading this file returns the process  group +                   ID  of the current process, in decimal, ter- +                   minated with a newline. + +       /dev/user   Reading this file returns  a  single  record +                   terminated  with  a newline.  The fields are +                   separated with spaces.  $1 is the  value  of +                   the  getuid(2)  system call, $2 is the value +                   of the geteuid(2) system  call,  $3  is  the +                   value  of  the getgid(2) system call, and $4 +                   is the value of the getegid(2) system  call. +                   If there are any additional fields, they are +                   the  group  IDs  returned  by  getgroups(2). +                   Multiple  groups may not be supported on all +                   systems. + +   Numeric Functions +       AWK has the following built-in arithmetic functions: + + +       atan2(y, x)   Returns the arctangent of y/x in  radians. + +       cos(expr)     Returns  the  cosine  of expr, which is in +                     radians. + +       exp(expr)     The exponential function. + +       int(expr)     Truncates to integer. + +       log(expr)     The natural logarithm function. + +       rand()        Returns a random number N, between  0  and +                     1, such that 0 <= N < 1. + +       sin(expr)     Returns  the  sine  of  expr,  which is in +                     radians. + +       sqrt(expr)    The square root function. + +       srand([expr]) Uses expr as a new  seed  for  the  random +                     number generator.  If no expr is provided, +                     the time of day is used.  The return value +                     is the previous seed for the random number +                     generator. + +   String Functions +       Gawk has the following built-in string functions: + + +       asort(s [, d])          Returns the number  of  elements +                               in the source array s.  The con- +                               tents  of  s  are  sorted  using +                               gawk's  normal rules for compar- +                               ing values, and the  indices  of +                               the   sorted  values  of  s  are +                               replaced with  sequential  inte- +                               gers  starting  with  1.  If the +                               optional destination array d  is +                               specified,   then   s  is  first +                               duplicated into d, and then d is +                               sorted,  leaving  the indices of +                               the source array s unchanged. + +       asorti(s [, d])         Returns the number  of  elements +                               in  the  source  array  s.   The +                               behavior is the same as that  of +                               asort(),  except  that the array +                               indices are  used  for  sorting, +                               not   the  array  values.   When +                               done,  the  array   is   indexed +                               numerically,  and the values are +                               those of the  original  indices. +                               The  original  values  are lost; +                               thus provide a second  array  if +                               you  wish to preserve the origi- +                               nal. + +       gensub(r, s, h [, t])   Search the target string  t  for +                               matches  of  the regular expres- +                               sion r.  If h is a string begin- +                               ning  with  g or G, then replace +                               all matches of r with s.  Other- +                               wise,  h  is a number indicating +                               which match of r to replace.  If +                               t  is  not  supplied, $0 is used +                               instead.  Within the replacement +                               text s, the sequence \n, where n +                               is a digit from 1 to 9,  may  be +                               used  to  indicate just the text +                               that matched the n'th  parenthe- +                               sized     subexpression.     The +                               sequence   \0   represents   the +                               entire matched text, as does the +                               character &.  Unlike  sub()  and +                               gsub(),  the  modified string is +                               returned as the  result  of  the +                               function,  and the original tar- +                               get string is not changed. + +       gsub(r, s [, t])        For each substring matching  the +                               regular   expression  r  in  the +                               string t, substitute the  string +                               s, and return the number of sub- +                               stitutions.  If t  is  not  sup- +                               plied,  use  $0.   An  &  in the +                               replacement  text  is   replaced +                               with  the text that was actually +                               matched.  Use \& to get  a  lit- +                               eral  &.  (This must be typed as +                               "\\&"; see GAWK:  Effective  AWK +                               Programming for a fuller discus- +                               sion of the rules  for  &'s  and +                               backslashes  in  the replacement +                               text of sub(), gsub(), and  gen- +                               sub().) + +       index(s, t)             Returns  the index of the string +                               t in the string s, or 0 if t  is +                               not present.  (This implies that +                               character indices start at one.) + +       length([s])             Returns the length of the string +                               s, or the length of $0 if  s  is +                               not   supplied.   Starting  with +                               version 3.1.5, as a non-standard +                               extension,  with  an array argu- +                               ment, length() returns the  num- +                               ber of elements in the array. + +       match(s, r [, a])       Returns  the position in s where +                               the regular expression r occurs, +                               or  0  if  r is not present, and +                               sets the values  of  RSTART  and +                               RLENGTH.  Note that the argument +                               order is the same as for  the  ~ +                               operator:  str ~ re.  If array a +                               is provided, a  is  cleared  and +                               then  elements  1  through n are +                               filled with the  portions  of  s +                               that   match  the  corresponding +                               parenthesized  subexpression  in +                               r.   The  0'th element of a con- +                               tains the portion of  s  matched +                               by the entire regular expression +                               r.   Subscripts  a[n,  "start"], +                               and  a[n,  "length"] provide the +                               starting index in the string and +                               length   respectively,  of  each +                               matching substring. + +       split(s, a [, r])       Splits the  string  s  into  the +                               array  a  on the regular expres- +                               sion r, and returns  the  number +                               of  fields.  If r is omitted, FS +                               is used instead.  The array a is +                               cleared     first.     Splitting +                               behaves  identically  to   field +                               splitting, described above. + +       sprintf(fmt, expr-list) Prints  expr-list  according  to +                               fmt, and returns  the  resulting +                               string. + +       strtonum(str)           Examines  str,  and  returns its +                               numeric value.   If  str  begins +                               with  a  leading  0,  strtonum() +                               assumes that  str  is  an  octal +                               number.   If  str  begins with a +                               leading  0x  or  0X,  strtonum() +                               assumes  that str is a hexadeci- +                               mal number. + +       sub(r, s [, t])         Just like gsub(), but  only  the +                               first   matching   substring  is +                               replaced. + +       substr(s, i [, n])      Returns the at most  n-character +                               substring  of  s  starting at i. +                               If n is omitted, the rest  of  s +                               is used. + +       tolower(str)            Returns  a  copy  of  the string +                               str,  with  all  the  upper-case +                               characters  in str translated to +                               their  corresponding  lower-case +                               counterparts.     Non-alphabetic +                               characters are left unchanged. + +       toupper(str)            Returns a  copy  of  the  string +                               str,  with  all  the  lower-case +                               characters in str translated  to +                               their  corresponding  upper-case +                               counterparts.     Non-alphabetic +                               characters are left unchanged. + +       As  of  version  3.1.5,  gawk  is multibyte aware.  This +       means that index(), length(), substr() and  match()  all +       work in terms of characters, not bytes. + +   Time Functions +       Since  one  of  the primary uses of AWK programs is pro- +       cessing log files that contain time  stamp  information, +       gawk provides the following functions for obtaining time +       stamps and formatting them. + + +       mktime(datespec) +                 Turns datespec into a time stamp of  the  same +                 form  as  returned by systime().  The datespec +                 is a string of the form YYYY MM DD HH  MM  SS[ +                 DST].   The  contents of the string are six or +                 seven numbers  representing  respectively  the +                 full  year including century, the month from 1 +                 to 12, the day of the month from 1 to 31,  the +                 hour  of the day from 0 to 23, the minute from +                 0 to 59, and the second from 0 to 60,  and  an +                 optional  daylight saving flag.  The values of +                 these numbers need not be  within  the  ranges +                 specified;  for example, an hour of -1 means 1 +                 hour before midnight.  The origin-zero  Grego- +                 rian  calendar is assumed, with year 0 preced- +                 ing year 1 and year -1 preceding year 0.   The +                 time  is  assumed to be in the local timezone. +                 If the daylight saving flag is  positive,  the +                 time is assumed to be daylight saving time; if +                 zero, the time is assumed to be standard time; +                 and   if   negative  (the  default),  mktime() +                 attempts to determine whether daylight  saving +                 time  is in effect for the specified time.  If +                 datespec does not contain enough  elements  or +                 if   the  resulting  time  is  out  of  range, +                 mktime() returns -1. + +       strftime([format [, timestamp[, utc-flag]]]) +                 Formats timestamp according to the  specifica- +                 tion in format.  If utc-flag is present and is +                 non-zero or non-null, the result  is  in  UTC, +                 otherwise  the  result  is in local time.  The +                 timestamp  should  be  of  the  same  form  as +                 returned  by systime().  If timestamp is miss- +                 ing, the current time of day is used.  If for- +                 mat is missing, a default format equivalent to +                 the output of date(1) is used.  See the speci- +                 fication for the strftime() function in ANSI C +                 for the format conversions that are guaranteed +                 to be available. + +       systime() Returns  the current time of day as the number +                 of  seconds  since   the   Epoch   (1970-01-01 +                 00:00:00 UTC on POSIX systems). + +   Bit Manipulations Functions +       Starting  with  version  3.1  of gawk, the following bit +       manipulation functions are available.  They work by con- +       verting   double-precision   floating  point  values  to +       uintmax_t integers, doing the operation, and  then  con- +       verting  the  result  back to floating point.  The func- +       tions are: + +       and(v1, v2)         Return the bitwise AND of the values +                           provided by v1 and v2. + +       compl(val)          Return  the  bitwise  complement  of +                           val. + +       lshift(val, count)  Return the  value  of  val,  shifted +                           left by count bits. + +       or(v1, v2)          Return  the bitwise OR of the values +                           provided by v1 and v2. + +       rshift(val, count)  Return the  value  of  val,  shifted +                           right by count bits. + +       xor(v1, v2)         Return the bitwise XOR of the values +                           provided by v1 and v2. + + +   Internationalization Functions +       Starting with version 3.1 of gawk, the  following  func- +       tions  may  be  used  from  within  your AWK program for +       translating strings at run-time.  For full details,  see +       GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + +       bindtextdomain(directory [, domain]) +              Specifies  the directory where gawk looks for the +              .mo files, in case they will  not  or  cannot  be +              placed  in the ``standard'' locations (e.g., dur- +              ing testing).  It  returns  the  directory  where +              domain is ``bound.'' +              The  default  domain  is the value of TEXTDOMAIN. +              If directory is the null string (""), then  bind- +              textdomain()  returns the current binding for the +              given domain. + +       dcgettext(string [, domain [, category]]) +              Returns the translation of string in text  domain +              domain for locale category category.  The default +              value for domain is the current value of  TEXTDO- +              MAIN.  The default value for category is "LC_MES- +              SAGES". +              If you supply a value for category, it must be  a +              string  equal  to  one  of the known locale cate- +              gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK  Program- +              ming.   You  must also supply a text domain.  Use +              TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + +       dcngettext(string1 , string2 , number [, domain [, cate- +       gory]]) +              Returns  the  plural  form used for number of the +              translation of string1 and string2 in text domain +              domain for locale category category.  The default +              value for domain is the current value of  TEXTDO- +              MAIN.  The default value for category is "LC_MES- +              SAGES". +              If you supply a value for category, it must be  a +              string  equal  to  one  of the known locale cate- +              gories described in GAWK: Effective AWK  Program- +              ming.   You  must also supply a text domain.  Use +              TEXTDOMAIN if you want to use the current domain. + +USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS +       Functions in AWK are defined as follows: + +              function name(parameter list) { statements } + +       Functions  are executed when they are called from within +       expressions  in  either  patterns  or  actions.   Actual +       parameters  supplied  in  the  function call are used to +       instantiate the formal parameters declared in the  func- +       tion.   Arrays  are passed by reference, other variables +       are passed by value. + +       Since functions were not originally part of the AWK lan- +       guage,  the  provision  for  local  variables  is rather +       clumsy: They are declared as  extra  parameters  in  the +       parameter  list.   The  convention  is to separate local +       variables from real parameters by extra  spaces  in  the +       parameter list.  For example: + +              function  f(p, q,     a, b)   # a and b are local +              { +                   ... +              } + +              /abc/     { ... ; f(1, 2) ; ... } + +       The  left  parenthesis in a function call is required to +       immediately follow the function name, without any inter- +       vening  white  space.  This avoids a syntactic ambiguity +       with the concatenation operator.  This restriction  does +       not apply to the built-in functions listed above. + +       Functions  may  call  each  other  and may be recursive. +       Function parameters used as local variables are initial- +       ized  to  the null string and the number zero upon func- +       tion invocation. + +       Use return expr to return a value from a function.   The +       return value is undefined if no value is provided, or if +       the function returns by "falling off" the end. + +       If --lint has been provided, gawk warns about  calls  to +       undefined  functions  at  parse  time, instead of at run +       time.  Calling an undefined function at run  time  is  a +       fatal error. + +       The word func may be used in place of function. + +DYNAMICALLY LOADING NEW FUNCTIONS +       Beginning  with version 3.1 of gawk, you can dynamically +       add new built-in functions to the  running  gawk  inter- +       preter.   The  full details are beyond the scope of this +       manual page; see GAWK: Effective AWK Programming for the +       details. + + +       extension(object, function) +               Dynamically link the shared object file named by +               object, and invoke function in that  object,  to +               perform  initialization.   These  should both be +               provided as strings.  Returns the value returned +               by function. + +       This function is provided and documented in GAWK: Effec- +       tive AWK Programming, but everything about this  feature +       is  likely  to change eventually.  We STRONGLY recommend +       that you do not use this feature for anything  that  you +       aren't willing to redo. + +SIGNALS +       pgawk  accepts two signals.  SIGUSR1 causes it to dump a +       profile and function call stack  to  the  profile  file, +       which  is either awkprof.out, or whatever file was named +       with the --profile option.  It then  continues  to  run. +       SIGHUP  causes  pgawk  to  dump the profile and function +       call stack and then exit. + +EXAMPLES +       Print and sort the login names of all users: + +            BEGIN     { FS = ":" } +                 { print $1 | "sort" } + +       Count lines in a file: + +                 { nlines++ } +            END  { print nlines } + +       Precede each line by its number in the file: + +            { print FNR, $0 } + +       Concatenate and line number (a variation on a theme): + +            { print NR, $0 } +       Run an external command for particular lines of data: + +            tail -f access_log | +            awk '/myhome.html/ { system("nmap " $1 ">> logdir/myhome.html") }' + +INTERNATIONALIZATION +       String constants are sequences of characters enclosed in +       double quotes.  In non-English speaking environments, it +       is possible to  mark  strings  in  the  AWK  program  as +       requiring  translation  to  the native natural language. +       Such strings are marked in the AWK program with a  lead- +       ing underscore ("_").  For example, + +              gawk 'BEGIN { print "hello, world" }' + +       always prints hello, world.  But, + +              gawk 'BEGIN { print _"hello, world" }' + +       might print bonjour, monde in France. + +       There  are  several steps involved in producing and run- +       ning a localizable AWK program. + +       1.  Add a BEGIN action to assign a value to the  TEXTDO- +           MAIN variable to set the text domain to a name asso- +           ciated with your program. + +           BEGIN { TEXTDOMAIN = "myprog" } + +       This allows gawk to find the .mo  file  associated  with +       your program.  Without this step, gawk uses the messages +       text domain, which likely does not contain  translations +       for your program. + +       2.  Mark  all  strings  that  should  be translated with +           leading underscores. + +       3.  If necessary, use the dcgettext() and/or bindtextdo- +           main() functions in your program, as appropriate. + +       4.  Run  gawk --gen-po -f myprog.awk > myprog.po to gen- +           erate a .po file for your program. + +       5.  Provide  appropriate  translations,  and  build  and +           install the corresponding .mo files. + +       The  internationalization features are described in full +       detail in GAWK: Effective AWK Programming. + +POSIX COMPATIBILITY +       A primary goal for gawk is compatibility with the  POSIX +       standard,  as  well  as  with the latest version of UNIX +       awk.  To this end, gawk incorporates the following  user +       visible  features  which  are  not  described in the AWK +       book, but are part of the Bell Laboratories  version  of +       awk, and are in the POSIX standard. + +       The book indicates that command line variable assignment +       happens when awk would otherwise open the argument as  a +       file,  which is after the BEGIN block is executed.  How- +       ever, in earlier implementations, when such  an  assign- +       ment  appeared  before  any  file  names, the assignment +       would happen before the BEGIN block was  run.   Applica- +       tions  came  to  depend on this "feature."  When awk was +       changed to match its documentation, the  -v  option  for +       assigning  variables  before program execution was added +       to accommodate applications that depended upon  the  old +       behavior.   (This  feature  was  agreed upon by both the +       Bell Laboratories and the GNU developers.) + +       The -W option for implementation  specific  features  is +       from the POSIX standard. + +       When  processing arguments, gawk uses the special option +       "--" to signal the end of arguments.   In  compatibility +       mode,  it  warns  about  but otherwise ignores undefined +       options.  In normal operation, such arguments are passed +       on to the AWK program for it to process. + +       The  AWK  book  does  not  define  the  return  value of +       srand().  The POSIX standard has it return the  seed  it +       was  using,  to  allow  keeping  track  of random number +       sequences.  Therefore srand() in gawk also  returns  its +       current seed. + +       Other  new  features are: The use of multiple -f options +       (from MKS awk); the ENVIRON array; the \a, and \v escape +       sequences (done originally in gawk and fed back into the +       Bell Laboratories version); the tolower() and  toupper() +       built-in functions (from the Bell Laboratories version); +       and the ANSI C conversion specifications in printf (done +       first in the Bell Laboratories version). + +HISTORICAL FEATURES +       There are two features of historical AWK implementations +       that gawk supports.  First, it is possible to  call  the +       length()  built-in  function  not only with no argument, +       but even without parentheses!  Thus, + +              a = length     # Holy Algol 60, Batman! + +       is the same as either of + +              a = length() +              a = length($0) + +       This feature is marked  as  "deprecated"  in  the  POSIX +       standard,  and  gawk  issues  a warning about its use if +       --lint is specified on the command line. + +       The other feature is the use of either the  continue  or +       the  break  statements outside the body of a while, for, +       or  do  loop.   Traditional  AWK  implementations   have +       treated  such usage as equivalent to the next statement. +       Gawk supports this usage if --traditional has been spec- +       ified. + +GNU EXTENSIONS +       Gawk  has a number of extensions to POSIX awk.  They are +       described in this section.  All the extensions described +       here  can be disabled by invoking gawk with the --tradi- +       tional or --posix options. + +       The following features of  gawk  are  not  available  in +       POSIX awk. + +       · No path search is performed for files named via the -f +         option.  Therefore the AWKPATH environment variable is +         not special. + +       · The \x escape sequence.  (Disabled with --posix.) + +       · The fflush() function.  (Disabled with --posix.) + +       · The  ability  to continue lines after ?  and :.  (Dis- +         abled with --posix.) + +       · Octal and hexadecimal constants in AWK programs. + +       · The ARGIND, BINMODE, ERRNO, LINT,  RT  and  TEXTDOMAIN +         variables are not special. + +       · The  IGNORECASE  variable and its side-effects are not +         available. + +       · The FIELDWIDTHS variable and fixed-width field  split- +         ting. + +       · The PROCINFO array is not available. + +       · The use of RS as a regular expression. + +       · The  special  file names available for I/O redirection +         are not recognized. + +       · The |& operator for creating co-processes. + +       · The ability to split out individual  characters  using +         the  null  string as the value of FS, and as the third +         argument to split(). + +       · The optional second argument to the close()  function. + +       · The optional third argument to the match() function. + +       · The  ability  to use positional specifiers with printf +         and sprintf(). + +       · The ability to pass an array to length(). + +       · The use of delete array to delete the entire  contents +         of an array. + +       · The  use of nextfile to abandon processing of the cur- +         rent input file. + +       · The  and(),   asort(),   asorti(),   bindtextdomain(), +         compl(),    dcgettext(),    dcngettext(),    gensub(), +         lshift(), mktime(), or(), rshift(),  strftime(),  str- +         tonum(), systime() and xor() functions. + +       · Localizable strings. + +       · Adding  new  built-in  functions  dynamically with the +         extension() function. + +       The AWK book does not define the  return  value  of  the +       close() function.  Gawk's close() returns the value from +       fclose(3), or pclose(3), when closing an output file  or +       pipe,  respectively.  It returns the process's exit sta- +       tus when closing an input pipe.  The return value is  -1 +       if  the  named  file,  pipe or co-process was not opened +       with a redirection. + +       When gawk is invoked with the --traditional  option,  if +       the  fs argument to the -F option is "t", then FS is set +       to the tab character.  Note that typing  gawk  -F\t  ... +       simply  causes  the shell to quote the "t," and does not +       pass "\t" to the -F option.  Since this is a rather ugly +       special  case,  it  is  not  the default behavior.  This +       behavior also does not occur if --posix has been  speci- +       fied.   To really get a tab character as the field sepa- +       rator, it is best to use single quotes: gawk -F'\t' .... + +       If gawk is configured with the --enable-switch option to +       the configure command, then  it  accepts  an  additional +       control-flow statement: +              switch (expression) { +              case value|regex : statement +              ... +              [ default: statement ] +              } + +       If  gawk  is  configured with the --disable-directories- +       fatal option, then it  will  silently  skip  directories +       named  on  the  command  line.  Otherwise, it will do so +       only if invoked with the --traditional option. + +ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES +       The AWKPATH environment variable can be used to  provide +       a  list  of  directories that gawk searches when looking +       for files named via the -f and --file options. + +       If POSIXLY_CORRECT exists in the environment, then  gawk +       behaves  exactly as if --posix had been specified on the +       command line.  If --lint has been specified, gawk issues +       a warning message to this effect. + +SEE ALSO +       egrep(1),  getpid(2), getppid(2), getpgrp(2), getuid(2), +       geteuid(2), getgid(2), getegid(2), getgroups(2) + +       The AWK Programming Language, Alfred V.  Aho,  Brian  W. +       Kernighan,  Peter  J.  Weinberger, Addison-Wesley, 1988. +       ISBN 0-201-07981-X. + +       GAWK: Effective AWK Programming, Edition 3.0,  published +       by the Free Software Foundation, 2001.  The current ver- +       sion  of  this   document   is   available   online   at +       http://www.gnu.org/software/gawk/manual. + +BUGS +       The  -F  option  is not necessary given the command line +       variable assignment feature; it remains only  for  back- +       wards compatibility. + +       Syntactically  invalid single character programs tend to +       overflow the parse stack, generating a rather  unhelpful +       message.   Such  programs  are surprisingly difficult to +       diagnose in the completely general case, and the  effort +       to do so really is not worth it. + +AUTHORS +       The original version of UNIX awk was designed and imple- +       mented  by  Alfred  Aho,  Peter  Weinberger,  and  Brian +       Kernighan of Bell Laboratories.  Brian Kernighan contin- +       ues to maintain and enhance it. + +       Paul Rubin and Jay Fenlason, of the Free Software  Foun- +       dation,  wrote  gawk, to be compatible with the original +       version of awk  distributed  in  Seventh  Edition  UNIX. +       John  Woods  contributed  a  number of bug fixes.  David +       Trueman, with contributions from  Arnold  Robbins,  made +       gawk  compatible  with  the  new  version  of  UNIX awk. +       Arnold Robbins is the current maintainer. + +       The initial DOS port was done by Conrad Kwok  and  Scott +       Garfinkle.   Scott Deifik is the current DOS maintainer. +       Pat Rankin did the port to VMS,  and  Michal  Jaegermann +       did the port to the Atari ST.  The port to OS/2 was done +       by Kai Uwe Rommel, with contributions and help from Dar- +       rel  Hankerson.  Juan M. Guerrero now maintains the OS/2 +       port.  Fred Fish supplied support  for  the  Amiga,  and +       Martin  Brown  provided  the  BeOS port.  Stephen Davies +       provided the original Tandem port, and  Matthew  Woehlke +       provided changes for Tandem's POSIX-compliant systems. + +VERSION INFORMATION +       This man page documents gawk, version 3.1.6. + +BUG REPORTS +       If  you  find a bug in gawk, please send electronic mail +       to bug-gawk@gnu.org.  Please include your operating sys- +       tem  and  its  revision,  the version of gawk (from gawk +       --version), what C compiler you used to compile it,  and +       a  test  program  and data that are as small as possible +       for reproducing the problem. + +       Before sending a bug report,  please  do  the  following +       things.   First, verify that you have the latest version +       of gawk.  Many bugs (usually subtle ones) are  fixed  at +       each  release,  and if yours is out of date, the problem +       may already have been solved.   Second,  please  see  if +       setting  the  environment  variable  LC_ALL  to LC_ALL=C +       causes things to behave as you expect.  If  so,  it's  a +       locale  issue,  and  may  or  may  not  really be a bug. +       Finally, please read this man  page  and  the  reference +       manual carefully to be sure that what you think is a bug +       really is, instead of just a quirk in the language. + +       Whatever  you  do,  do  NOT  post  a   bug   report   in +       comp.lang.awk.   While  the gawk developers occasionally +       read this newsgroup, posting bug  reports  there  is  an +       unreliable  way to report bugs.  Instead, please use the +       electronic mail addresses given above. + +       If you're using a GNU/Linux system or BSD-based  system, +       you  may  wish  to  submit a bug report to the vendor of +       your distribution.  That's fine, but please send a  copy +       to  the official email address as well, since there's no +       guarantee that the bug will be  forwarded  to  the  gawk +       maintainer. + +ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS +       Brian  Kernighan  of Bell Laboratories provided valuable +       assistance during testing and debugging.  We thank  him. + +COPYING PERMISSIONS +       Copyright  ©  1989,  1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, +       1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002,  2003,  2004,  2005,  2007 +       Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +       Permission  is  granted  to make and distribute verbatim +       copies of this manual page provided the copyright notice +       and  this permission notice are preserved on all copies. + +       Permission is granted to copy  and  distribute  modified +       versions  of  this  manual page under the conditions for +       verbatim copying, provided  that  the  entire  resulting +       derived work is distributed under the terms of a permis- +       sion notice identical to this one. + +       Permission is granted to copy  and  distribute  transla- +       tions  of  this manual page into another language, under +       the above conditions for modified versions, except  that +       this  permission  notice  may be stated in a translation +       approved by the Foundation. + + + +Free Software Foundation          Oct 19 2007                          GAWK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pinky.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pinky.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..637be84 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pinky.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +PINKY(1)                 User Commands                 PINKY(1) + + + + + +NAME +       pinky - lightweight finger + +SYNOPSIS +       pinky [OPTION]... [USER]... + +DESCRIPTION +       -l     produce  long  format  output  for  the specified +              USERs + +       -b     omit the user's home directory and shell in  long +              format + +       -h     omit the user's project file in long format + +       -p     omit the user's plan file in long format + +       -s     do short format output, this is the default + +       -f     omit the line of column headings in short format + +       -w     omit the user's full name in short format + +       -i     omit  the  user's  full  name  and remote host in +              short format + +       -q     omit the user's full name, remote host  and  idle +              time in short format + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       A lightweight `finger' program;  print user information. +       The utmp file will be /var/run/utmp. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Joseph Arceneaux, David MacKenzie, and  Kaveh +       Ghazi. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for pinky is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and pinky programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info pinky + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pinky 5.3.0              November 2004                 PINKY(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pr.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pr.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed02e0b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pr.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +PR(1)                    User Commands                    PR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       pr - convert text files for printing + +SYNOPSIS +       pr [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Paginate or columnate FILE(s) for printing. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       +FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE], --pages=FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE] +              begin [stop] printing with page FIRST_[LAST_]PAGE + +       -COLUMN, --columns=COLUMN +              output  COLUMN  columns  and  print columns down, +              unless -a is used. Balance number of lines in the +              columns on each page. + +       -a, --across +              print  columns  across  rather  than  down,  used +              together with -COLUMN + +       -c, --show-control-chars +              use hat notation (^G) and octal  backslash  nota- +              tion + +       -d, --double-space +              double space the output + +       -D, --date-format=FORMAT +              use FORMAT for the header date + +       -e[CHAR[WIDTH]], --expand-tabs[=CHAR[WIDTH]] +              expand input CHARs (TABs) to tab WIDTH (8) + +       -F, -f, --form-feed +              use  form  feeds  instead of newlines to separate +              pages (by a 3-line  page  header  with  -F  or  a +              5-line header and trailer without -F) + +       -h HEADER, --header=HEADER +              use a centered HEADER instead of filename in page +              header, -h "" prints a blank line, don't use -h"" + +       -i[CHAR[WIDTH]], --output-tabs[=CHAR[WIDTH]] +              replace spaces with CHARs (TABs) to tab WIDTH (8) + +       -J, --join-lines +              merge full lines, turns off -W  line  truncation, +              no  column  alignment, --sep-string[=STRING] sets +              separators + +       -l PAGE_LENGTH, --length=PAGE_LENGTH +              set the page length  to  PAGE_LENGTH  (66)  lines +              (default  number of lines of text 56, and with -F +              63) + +       -m, --merge +              print all files in parallel, one in each  column, +              truncate  lines,  but  join  lines of full length +              with -J + +       -n[SEP[DIGITS]], --number-lines[=SEP[DIGITS]] +              number lines, use DIGITS  (5)  digits,  then  SEP +              (TAB),  default  counting starts with 1st line of +              input file + +       -N NUMBER, --first-line-number=NUMBER +              start counting with NUMBER at 1st line  of  first +              page printed (see +FIRST_PAGE) + +       -o MARGIN, --indent=MARGIN +              offset  each  line  with MARGIN (zero) spaces, do +              not affect -w or -W,  MARGIN  will  be  added  to +              PAGE_WIDTH + +       -r, --no-file-warnings +              omit warning when a file cannot be opened + +       -s[CHAR],--separator[=CHAR] +              separate  columns  by a single character, default +              for CHAR is the <TAB> character  without  -w  and +              'no char' with -w -s[CHAR] turns off line trunca- +              tion of all 3 column  options  (-COLUMN|-a  -COL- +              UMN|-m) except -w is set + +       -SSTRING, --sep-string[=STRING] +              separate  columns  by STRING, without -S: Default +              separator <TAB> with  -J  and  <space>  otherwise +              (same as -S" "), no effect on column options + +       -t, --omit-header omit page headers and trailers + +       -T, --omit-pagination +              omit  page  headers  and  trailers, eliminate any +              pagination by form feeds set in input files + +       -v, --show-nonprinting +              use octal backslash notation + +       -w PAGE_WIDTH, --width=PAGE_WIDTH +              set page width to PAGE_WIDTH (72) characters  for +              multiple  text-column output only, -s[char] turns +              off (72) + +       -W PAGE_WIDTH, --page-width=PAGE_WIDTH +              set page  width  to  PAGE_WIDTH  (72)  characters +              always,  truncate lines, except -J option is set, +              no interference with -S or -s + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       -T implied by -l nn when nn <= 10 or <= 3 with -F.  With +       no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Pete TerMaat and Roland Huebner. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for pr is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  pr  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info pr + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pr 5.3.0                  January 2005                    PR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printenv.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printenv.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec917ed --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printenv.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +PRINTENV(1)              User Commands              PRINTENV(1) + + + + + +NAME +       printenv - print all or part of environment + +SYNOPSIS +       printenv [VARIABLE]... +       printenv OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       If no environment VARIABLE specified, print them all. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie and Richard Mlynarik. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for printenv is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and printenv  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info printenv + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +printenv 5.3.0           November 2004              PRINTENV(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printf.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printf.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6a7719 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/printf.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +PRINTF(1)                User Commands                PRINTF(1) + + + + + +NAME +       printf - format and print data + +SYNOPSIS +       printf FORMAT [ARGUMENT]... +       printf OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       NOTE:  your  shell  may  have  its own version of printf +       which will supersede the version described here.  Please +       refer  to  your  shell's documentation for details about +       the options it supports. + +       Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       FORMAT controls the output as in C printf.   Interpreted +       sequences are: + +       \"     double quote + +       \NNN   character with octal value NNN (1 to 3 digits) + +       \\     backslash + +       \a     alert (BEL) + +       \b     backspace + +       \c     produce no further output + +       \f     form feed + +       \n     new line + +       \r     carriage return + +       \t     horizontal tab + +       \v     vertical tab + +       \xHH   byte with hexadecimal value HH (1 to 2 digits) + +       \uHHHH Unicode  (ISO/IEC 10646) character with hex value +              HHHH (4 digits) + +       \UHHHHHHHH +              Unicode character with hex value HHHHHHHH (8 dig- +              its) + +       %%     a single % + +       %b     ARGUMENT  as  a  string  with  `\' escapes inter- +              preted, + +              except that octal escapes are of the form  \0  or +              \0NNN + +       and  all  C  format  specifications  ending  with one of +       diouxXfeEgGcs, with ARGUMENTs converted to  proper  type +       first.  Variable widths are handled. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation  for  printf is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info  and  printf  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info printf + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +printf 5.3.0             November 2004                PRINTF(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ptx.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ptx.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74c4538 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/ptx.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +PTX(1)                   User Commands                   PTX(1) + + + + + +NAME +       ptx - produce a permuted index of file contents + +SYNOPSIS +       ptx [OPTION]... [INPUT]...   (without -G) +       ptx -G [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]] + +DESCRIPTION +       Output a permuted index, including context, of the words +       in the input files. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -A, --auto-reference +              output automatically generated references + +       -C, --copyright +              display Copyright and copying conditions + +       -G, --traditional +              behave more like System V `ptx' + +       -F, --flag-truncation=STRING +              use STRING for flagging line truncations + +       -M, --macro-name=STRING +              macro name to use instead of `xx' + +       -O, --format=roff +              generate output as roff directives + +       -R, --right-side-refs +              put references at right, not counted in -w + +       -S, --sentence-regexp=REGEXP +              for end of lines or end of sentences + +       -T, --format=tex +              generate output as TeX directives + +       -W, --word-regexp=REGEXP +              use REGEXP to match each keyword + +       -b, --break-file=FILE +              word break characters in this FILE + +       -f, --ignore-case +              fold lower case to upper case for sorting + +       -g, --gap-size=NUMBER +              gap size in columns between output fields + +       -i, --ignore-file=FILE +              read ignore word list from FILE + +       -o, --only-file=FILE +              read only word list from this FILE + +       -r, --references +              first field of each line is a reference + +       -t, --typeset-mode               - not implemented - + +       -w, --width=NUMBER +              output width in columns, reference excluded + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       With  no FILE or if FILE is -, read Standard Input.  `-F +       /' by default. + +AUTHOR +       Written by F. Pinard. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for ptx is maintained as  a  Tex- +       info  manual.  If the info and ptx programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info ptx + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +ptx 5.3.0                November 2004                   PTX(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pwd.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pwd.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0458a8a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/pwd.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +PWD(1)                   User Commands                   PWD(1) + + + + + +NAME +       pwd - print name of current/working directory + +SYNOPSIS +       pwd [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION +       NOTE:  your  shell may have its own version of pwd which +       will supersede the version described here. Please  refer +       to  your  shell's  documentation  for  details about the +       options it supports. + +       Print the full filename of the  current  working  direc- +       tory. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for pwd is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and pwd programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info pwd + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +pwd 5.3.0                November 2004                   PWD(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/readlink.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/readlink.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..830accf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/readlink.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +READLINK(1)              User Commands              READLINK(1) + + + + + +NAME +       readlink - display value of a symbolic link + +SYNOPSIS +       readlink [OPTION]... FILE + +DESCRIPTION +       Display value of a symbolic link on standard output. + +       -f, --canonicalize +              canonicalize  by following every symlink in every +              component of the given path recursively; all  but +              the last path component must exist + +       -e, --canonicalize-existing +              canonicalize  by following every symlink in every +              component of the given path recursively, all path +              components must exist + +       -m, --canonicalize-missing +              canonicalize  by following every symlink in every +              component of the given path recursively,  without +              requirements on components existence + +       -n, --no-newline +              do not output the trailing newline + +       -q, --quiet, + +       -s, --silent +              suppress most error messages + +       -v, --verbose +              report error messages + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Dmitry V. Levin. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for readlink is maintained as a +       Texinfo manual.  If the info and readlink  programs  are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info readlink + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +readlink 5.3.0           November 2004              READLINK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rm.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rm.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bc315f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rm.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +RM(1)                    User Commands                    RM(1) + + + + + +NAME +       rm - remove files or directories + +SYNOPSIS +       rm [OPTION]... FILE... + +DESCRIPTION +       This  manual  page  documents the GNU version of rm.  rm +       removes each specified file.  By default,  it  does  not +       remove directories. + +       If  a  file  is unwritable, the standard input is a tty, +       and the -f or --force option is not  given,  rm  prompts +       the  user  for  whether  to  remove  the  file.   If the +       response is not affirmative, the file is skipped. + +OPTIONS +       Remove (unlink) the FILE(s). + +       -d, --directory +              unlink FILE, even if it is a non-empty  directory +              (super-user only; this works only if your system + +              supports `unlink' for nonempty directories) + +       -f, --force +              ignore nonexistent files, never prompt + +       -i, --interactive +              prompt before any removal + +       --no-preserve-root  do  not  treat  `/'  specially  (the +              default) + +       --preserve-root +              fail to operate recursively on `/' + +       -r, -R, --recursive +              remove the contents of directories recursively + +       -v, --verbose +              explain what is being done + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       To remove a file whose name starts with a `-', for exam- +       ple `-foo', use one of these commands: + +              rm -- -foo + +              rm ./-foo + +       Note  that if you use rm to remove a file, it is usually +       possible to recover the contents of that file.   If  you +       want more assurance that the contents are truly unrecov- +       erable, consider using shred. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie,  Richard  Stall- +       man, and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       chattr(1), shred(1) + +       The full documentation for rm is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  rm  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info rm + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +rm 5.3.0                 November 2004                    RM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rmdir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rmdir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87821e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/rmdir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +RMDIR(1)                 User Commands                 RMDIR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       rmdir - remove empty directories + +SYNOPSIS +       rmdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY... + +DESCRIPTION +       Remove the DIRECTORY(ies), if they are empty. + +       --ignore-fail-on-non-empty + +              ignore  each  failure  that  is  solely because a +              directory is non-empty + +       -p, --parents +              remove DIRECTORY, then try to remove each  direc- +              tory  component  of that path name.  E.g., `rmdir +              -p a/b/c' is similar to `rmdir a/b/c a/b a'. + +       -v, --verbose +              output a diagnostic for every directory processed + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for rmdir is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and rmdir programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info rmdir + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +rmdir 5.3.0              November 2004                 RMDIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sed.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sed.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f1153f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sed.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,321 @@ +SED(1)                   User Commands                   SED(1) + + + +NAME +       sed - stream editor for filtering and transforming text + +SYNOPSIS +       sed.exe   [OPTION]...   {script-only-if-no-other-script} +       [input-file]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Sed is a stream editor.  A stream editor is used to per- +       form  basic  text  transformations on an input stream (a +       file or input from a pipeline).  While in some ways sim- +       ilar  to an editor which permits scripted edits (such as +       ed),  sed  works  by  making  only  one  pass  over  the +       input(s), and is consequently more efficient.  But it is +       sed's ability to filter text in a pipeline which partic- +       ularly distinguishes it from other types of editors. + +       -n, --quiet, --silent + +              suppress automatic printing of pattern space + +       -e script, --expression=script + +              add the script to the commands to be executed + +       -f script-file, --file=script-file + +              add  the  contents of script-file to the commands +              to be executed + +       -i[SUFFIX], --in-place[=SUFFIX] + +              edit files in place (makes  backup  if  extension +              supplied) + +       -b, --binary + +              open  files  in  binary mode (CR+LFs are not pro- +              cessed specially) + +       -c, --copy + +              use copy instead of rename when  shuffling  files +              in  -i  mode  (avoids change of input file owner- +              ship) + +       -l N, --line-length=N + +              specify the desired line-wrap length for the  `l' +              command + +       --posix + +              disable all GNU extensions. + +       -r, --regexp-extended + +              use extended regular expressions in the script. + +       -s, --separate + +              consider  files as separate rather than as a sin- +              gle continuous long stream. + +       -u, --unbuffered + +              load minimal amounts of data from the input files +              and flush the output buffers more often + +       --help +              display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If  no  -e, --expression, -f, or --file option is given, +       then the first non-option argument is taken as  the  sed +       script  to interpret.  All remaining arguments are names +       of input files; if no input files  are  specified,  then +       the standard input is read. + +       GNU  sed  home page: <http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/>. +       General       help       using       GNU       software: +       <http://www.gnu.org/gethelp/>.   E-mail  bug reports to: +       <bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>.  Be sure to  include  the  word +       ``sed'' somewhere in the ``Subject:'' field. + +COMMAND SYNOPSIS +       This  is  just a brief synopsis of sed commands to serve +       as a reminder to those who already know sed; other docu- +       mentation  (such  as  the texinfo document) must be con- +       sulted for fuller descriptions. + +   Zero-address ``commands'' +       : label +              Label for b and t commands. + +       #comment +              The comment extends until the  next  newline  (or +              the end of a -e script fragment). + +       }      The closing bracket of a { } block. + +   Zero- or One- address commands +       =      Print the current line number. + +       a \ + +       text   Append text, which has each embedded newline pre- +              ceded by a backslash. + +       i \ + +       text   Insert text, which has each embedded newline pre- +              ceded by a backslash. + +       q [exit-code] +              Immediately  quit the sed script without process- +              ing any more input, except that if auto-print  is +              not  disabled  the  current pattern space will be +              printed.  The exit code argument is a GNU  exten- +              sion. + +       Q [exit-code] +              Immediately  quit the sed script without process- +              ing any more input.  This is a GNU extension. + +       r filename +              Append text read from filename. + +       R filename +              Append a line read from filename.   Each  invoca- +              tion  of  the command reads a line from the file. +              This is a GNU extension. + +   Commands which accept address ranges +       {      Begin a block of commands (end with a }). + +       b label +              Branch to label; if label is omitted,  branch  to +              end of script. + +       t label +              If  a  s///  has  done  a successful substitution +              since the last input line was read and since  the +              last  t  or  T  command, then branch to label; if +              label is omitted, branch to end of script. + +       T label +              If no s/// has  done  a  successful  substitution +              since  the last input line was read and since the +              last t or T command, then  branch  to  label;  if +              label  is omitted, branch to end of script.  This +              is a GNU extension. + +       c \ + +       text   Replace the selected lines with text,  which  has +              each embedded newline preceded by a backslash. + +       d      Delete pattern space.  Start next cycle. + +       D      Delete  up  to  the first embedded newline in the +              pattern space.  Start next cycle, but skip  read- +              ing  from the input if there is still data in the +              pattern space. + +       h H    Copy/append pattern space to hold space. + +       g G    Copy/append hold space to pattern space. + +       x      Exchange the contents of  the  hold  and  pattern +              spaces. + +       l      List  out  the current line in a ``visually unam- +              biguous'' form. + +       l width +              List out the current line in a  ``visually  unam- +              biguous''  form, breaking it at width characters. +              This is a GNU extension. + +       n N    Read/append the next line of input into the  pat- +              tern space. + +       p      Print the current pattern space. + +       P      Print  up  to  the  first embedded newline of the +              current pattern space. + +       s/regexp/replacement/ +              Attempt  to  match  regexp  against  the  pattern +              space.    If  successful,  replace  that  portion +              matched with replacement.   The  replacement  may +              contain  the special character & to refer to that +              portion of the pattern space which  matched,  and +              the special escapes \1 through \9 to refer to the +              corresponding  matching  sub-expressions  in  the +              regexp. + +       w filename +              Write the current pattern space to filename. + +       W filename +              Write the first line of the current pattern space +              to filename.  This is a GNU extension. + +       y/source/dest/ +              Transliterate the characters in the pattern space +              which appear in source to the corresponding char- +              acter in dest. + +Addresses +       Sed commands can be given with no  addresses,  in  which +       case  the  command will be executed for all input lines; +       with one address, in which case the command will only be +       executed  for  input  lines which match that address; or +       with two addresses, in which case the  command  will  be +       executed  for  all input lines which match the inclusive +       range of lines starting from the first address and  con- +       tinuing  to  the  second  address.  Three things to note +       about address ranges: the syntax is  addr1,addr2  (i.e., +       the  addresses are separated by a comma); the line which +       addr1 matched will always be  accepted,  even  if  addr2 +       selects  an  earlier  line; and if addr2 is a regexp, it +       will not be tested against the line that addr1 matched. + +       After the address (or  address-range),  and  before  the +       command,  a !  may be inserted, which specifies that the +       command shall  only  be  executed  if  the  address  (or +       address-range) does not match. + +       The following address types are supported: + +       number Match only the specified line number. + +       first~step +              Match  every  step'th  line  starting  with  line +              first.  For example, ``sed -n 1~2p''  will  print +              all  the  odd-numbered lines in the input stream, +              and the address 2~5 will match every fifth  line, +              starting  with the second.  first can be zero; in +              this case, sed operates as if it  were  equal  to +              step.  (This is an extension.) + +       $      Match the last line. + +       /regexp/ +              Match  lines matching the regular expression reg- +              exp. + +       \cregexpc +              Match lines matching the regular expression  reg- +              exp.  The c may be any character. + +       GNU sed also supports some special 2-address forms: + +       0,addr2 +              Start out in "matched first address" state, until +              addr2 is found.   This  is  similar  to  1,addr2, +              except  that if addr2 matches the very first line +              of input the 0,addr2 form will be at the  end  of +              its range, whereas the 1,addr2 form will still be +              at the beginning of its range.  This  works  only +              when addr2 is a regular expression. + +       addr1,+N +              Will match addr1 and the N lines following addr1. + +       addr1,~N +              Will  match  addr1  and the lines following addr1 +              until the next line whose input line number is  a +              multiple of N. + +REGULAR EXPRESSIONS +       POSIX.2  BREs  should be supported, but they aren't com- +       pletely  because  of  performance  problems.    The   \n +       sequence  in  a  regular  expression matches the newline +       character,  and  similarly  for  \a,   \t,   and   other +       sequences. + +BUGS +       E-mail  bug  reports  to  bonzini@gnu.org.   Be  sure to +       include the word ``sed'' somewhere in  the  ``Subject:'' +       field.   Also, please include the output of ``sed --ver- +       sion'' in the body of your report if at all possible. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright © 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, to  the  extent +       permitted by law. + +       GNU  sed  home page: <http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/>. +       General       help       using       GNU       software: +       <http://www.gnu.org/gethelp/>.   E-mail  bug reports to: +       <bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>.  Be sure to  include  the  word +       ``sed'' somewhere in the ``Subject:'' field. + +SEE ALSO +       awk(1),  ed(1), grep(1), tr(1), perlre(1), sed.info, any +       of various books on sed, the sed FAQ +       (http://sed.sf.net/grabbag/tutorials/sedfaq.txt), +       http://sed.sf.net/grabbag/. + +       The full documentation for sed is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and sed programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info sed + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sed version 4.2.1          June 2009                     SED(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/seq.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/seq.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb0419e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/seq.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +SEQ(1)                   User Commands                   SEQ(1) + + + + + +NAME +       seq - print a sequence of numbers + +SYNOPSIS +       seq [OPTION]... LAST +       seq [OPTION]... FIRST LAST +       seq [OPTION]... FIRST INCREMENT LAST + +DESCRIPTION +       Print numbers from FIRST to LAST, in steps of INCREMENT. + +       -f, --format=FORMAT +              use printf style floating-point FORMAT  (default: +              %g) + +       -s, --separator=STRING +              use STRING to separate numbers (default: \n) + +       -w, --equal-width +              equalize width by padding with leading zeroes + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If  FIRST  or  INCREMENT  is  omitted, it defaults to 1. +       That is, an omitted INCREMENT defaults to  1  even  when +       LAST  is smaller than FIRST.  FIRST, INCREMENT, and LAST +       are interpreted as floating point values.  INCREMENT  is +       usually  positive  if  FIRST  is  smaller than LAST, and +       INCREMENT is usually negative if FIRST is  greater  than +       LAST.   When  given,  the  FORMAT  argument must contain +       exactly one of the printf-style, floating  point  output +       formats %e, %f, %g + +AUTHOR +       Written by Ulrich Drepper. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for seq is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and seq programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info seq + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +seq 5.3.0                December 2004                   SEQ(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sha1sum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sha1sum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a249897 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sha1sum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +SHA1SUM(1)               User Commands               SHA1SUM(1) + + + + + +NAME +       sha1sum - compute and check SHA1 message digest + +SYNOPSIS +       sha1sum [OPTION] [FILE]... +       sha1sum [OPTION] --check [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print  or check SHA1 (160-bit) checksums.  With no FILE, +       or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +       -b, --binary +              read files in binary mode  (default  on  DOS/Win- +              dows) + +       -c, --check +              check SHA1 sums against given list + +       -t, --text +              read files in text mode (default) + +   The  following  two  options  are useful only when verifying +       checksums: +       --status +              don't output anything, status code shows success + +       -w, --warn +              warn about improperly formated checksum lines + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       The sums are computed as described in FIPS-180-1.   When +       checking,  the  input  should be a former output of this +       program.  The default mode  is  to  print  a  line  with +       checksum, a character indicating type (`*' for binary, ` +       ' for text), and name for each FILE. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Ulrich Drepper and Scott Miller. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for sha1sum is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the info and sha1sum programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info sha1sum + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sha1sum 5.3.0            November 2004               SHA1SUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/shred.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/shred.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3748041 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/shred.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +SHRED(1)                 User Commands                 SHRED(1) + + + + + +NAME +       shred  -  overwrite  a  file  to  hide its contents, and +       optionally delete it + +SYNOPSIS +       shred [OPTIONS] FILE [...] + +DESCRIPTION +       Overwrite the specified FILE(s) repeatedly, in order  to +       make  it harder for even very expensive hardware probing +       to recover the data. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -f, --force +              change permissions to allow writing if necessary + +       -n, --iterations=N +              Overwrite N times instead of the default (25) + +       -s, --size=N +              shred  this  many  bytes  (suffixes  like K, M, G +              accepted) + +       -u, --remove +              truncate and remove file after overwriting + +       -v, --verbose +              show progress + +       -x, --exact +              do not round file  sizes  up  to  the  next  full +              block; + +              this is the default for non-regular files + +       -z, --zero +              add  a  final overwrite with zeros to hide shred- +              ding + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If FILE is -, shred standard output. + +       Delete FILE(s)  if  --remove  (-u)  is  specified.   The +       default  is not to remove the files because it is common +       to operate on device  files  like  /dev/hda,  and  those +       files  usually should not be removed.  When operating on +       regular files, most people use the --remove option. + +       CAUTION: Note that shred  relies  on  a  very  important +       assumption:  that  the  file  system  overwrites data in +       place.  This is the traditional way to  do  things,  but +       many  modern  file  system  designs  do not satisfy this +       assumption.  The following are examples of file  systems +       on which shred is not effective: + +       *  log-structured  or  journaled  file  systems, such as +       those supplied with + +              AIX and Solaris (and JFS,  ReiserFS,  XFS,  Ext3, +              etc.) + +       *  file  systems  that write redundant data and carry on +       even if some writes + +              fail, such as RAID-based file systems + +       * file systems that  make  snapshots,  such  as  Network +       Appliance's NFS server + +       *  file  systems that cache in temporary locations, such +       as NFS + +              version 3 clients + +       * compressed file systems + +       In addition, file system backups and remote mirrors  may +       contain  copies  of the file that cannot be removed, and +       that will allow a shredded file to be recovered later. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Colin Plumb. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for shred is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and shred programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info shred + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +shred 5.3.0               January 2005                 SHRED(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sleep.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sleep.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ed8ec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sleep.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +SLEEP(1)                 User Commands                 SLEEP(1) + + + + + +NAME +       sleep - delay for a specified amount of time + +SYNOPSIS +       sleep NUMBER[SUFFIX]... +       sleep OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Pause for NUMBER seconds.  SUFFIX may be `s' for seconds +       (the default), `m' for minutes, `h' for hours or `d' for +       days.   Unlike  most implementations that require NUMBER +       be an integer, here NUMBER may be an arbitrary  floating +       point number. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering and Paul Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for sleep is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and sleep programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info sleep + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sleep 5.3.0              November 2004                 SLEEP(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sort.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sort.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87be6a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sort.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +SORT(1)                  User Commands                  SORT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       sort - sort lines of text files + +SYNOPSIS +       sort [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Write  sorted  concatenation  of all FILE(s) to standard +       output. + +       Ordering options: + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -b, --ignore-leading-blanks ignore leading blanks + +       -d, --dictionary-order +              consider only blanks and alphanumeric characters + +       -f, --ignore-case +              fold lower case to upper case characters + +       -g, --general-numeric-sort +              compare according to general numerical value + +       -i, --ignore-nonprinting +              consider only printable characters + +       -M, --month-sort +              compare (unknown) < `JAN' < ... < `DEC' + +       -n, --numeric-sort +              compare according to string numerical value + +       -r, --reverse +              reverse the result of comparisons + +       Other options: + +       -c, --check +              check whether input is sorted; do not sort + +       -k, --key=POS1[,POS2] +              start a key at POS1, end it at POS 2 (origin 1) + +       -m, --merge +              merge already sorted files; do not sort + +       -o, --output=FILE +              write result to FILE instead of standard output + +       -s, --stable +              stabilize  sort by disabling last-resort compari- +              son + +       -S, --buffer-size=SIZE +              use SIZE for main memory buffer + +       -t, --field-separator=SEP use SEP instead  of  non-blank +              to blank transition + +       -T, --temporary-directory=DIR +              use  DIR  for  temporaries,  not $TMPDIR or /tmp; +              multiple options specify multiple directories + +       -u, --unique +              with -c, check for strict ordering;  without  -c, +              output only the first of an equal run + +       -z, --zero-terminated +              end lines with 0 byte, not newline + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       POS  is  F[.C][OPTS],  where F is the field number and C +       the character position in the field.   OPTS  is  one  or +       more  single-letter  ordering  options,  which  override +       global ordering options for that  key.   If  no  key  is +       given, use the entire line as the key. + +       SIZE  may  be  followed  by the following multiplicative +       suffixes: % 1% of memory, b 1, K 1024 (default), and  so +       on for M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +       With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +       ***  WARNING *** The locale specified by the environment +       affects sort order.  Set LC_ALL=C to get the traditional +       sort order that uses native byte values. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Mike Haertel and Paul Eggert. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for sort is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and sort programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info sort + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sort 5.3.0               December 2004                  SORT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/split.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/split.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..732a758 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/split.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +SPLIT(1)                 User Commands                 SPLIT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       split - split a file into pieces + +SYNOPSIS +       split [OPTION] [INPUT [PREFIX]] + +DESCRIPTION +       Output fixed-size pieces of INPUT to PREFIXaa, PREFIXab, +       ...; default PREFIX is `x'.   With  no  INPUT,  or  when +       INPUT is -, read standard input. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -a, --suffix-length=N +              use suffixes of length N (default 2) + +       -b, --bytes=SIZE +              put SIZE bytes per output file + +       -C, --line-bytes=SIZE +              put at most SIZE bytes of lines per output file + +       -d, --numeric-suffixes +              use numeric suffixes instead of alphabetic + +       -l, --lines=NUMBER +              put NUMBER lines per output file + +       --verbose +              print a diagnostic to standard error just  before +              each output file is opened + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIZE  may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1K, +       m for 1 Meg. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Torbjorn Granlund and Richard M. Stallman. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for split is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and split programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info split + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +split 5.3.0              December 2004                 SPLIT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stat.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stat.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddb9d58 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stat.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +STAT(1)                  User Commands                  STAT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       stat - display file or file system status + +SYNOPSIS +       stat [OPTION] FILE... + +DESCRIPTION +       Display file or file system status. + +       -f, --file-system +              display file system status instead of file status + +       -c  --format=FORMAT +              use the specified FORMAT instead of the default + +       -L, --dereference +              follow links + +       -t, --terse +              print the information in terse form + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       The  valid   format   sequences   for   files   (without +       --file-system): + +       %A     Access rights in human readable form + +       %a     Access rights in octal + +       %B     The size in bytes of each block reported by `%b' + +       %b     Number of blocks allocated (see %B) + +       %D     Device number in hex + +       %d     Device number in decimal + +       %F     File type + +       %f     Raw mode in hex + +       %G     Group name of owner + +       %g     Group ID of owner + +       %h     Number of hard links + +       %i     Inode number + +       %N     Quoted  File  name  with  dereference if symbolic +              link + +       %n     File name + +       %o     IO block size + +       %s     Total size, in bytes + +       %T     Minor device type in hex + +       %t     Major device type in hex + +       %U     User name of owner + +       %u     User ID of owner + +       %X     Time of last access as seconds since Epoch + +       %x     Time of last access + +       %Y     Time of last modification as seconds since Epoch + +       %y     Time of last modification + +       %Z     Time of last change as seconds since Epoch + +       %z     Time of last change + +       Valid format sequences for file systems: + +       %a     Free blocks available to non-superuser + +       %b     Total data blocks in file system + +       %c     Total file nodes in file system + +       %d     Free file nodes in file system + +       %f     Free blocks in file system + +       %i     File System id in hex + +       %l     Maximum length of filenames + +       %n     File name + +       %s     Optimal transfer block size + +       %T     Type in human readable form + +       %t     Type in hex + +AUTHOR +       Written by Michael Meskes. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for stat is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and stat programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info stat + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +stat 5.3.0               November 2004                  STAT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stty.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stty.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d1cebf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/stty.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,403 @@ +STTY(1)                  User Commands                  STTY(1) + + + + + +NAME +       stty - change and print terminal line settings + +SYNOPSIS +       stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [SETTING]... +       stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [-a|--all] +       stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [-g|--save] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print or change terminal characteristics. + +       -a, --all +              print all current settings in human-readable form + +       -g, --save +              print all current  settings  in  a  stty-readable +              form + +       -F, --file=DEVICE +              open  and  use  the  specified  DEVICE instead of +              stdin + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Optional - before  SETTING  indicates  negation.   An  * +       marks non-POSIX settings.  The underlying system defines +       which settings are available. + +   Special characters: +       * dsusp CHAR +              CHAR will send a terminal stop signal once  input +              flushed + +       eof CHAR +              CHAR  will  send  an  end  of file (terminate the +              input) + +       eol CHAR +              CHAR will end the line + +       * eol2 CHAR +              alternate CHAR for ending the line + +       erase CHAR +              CHAR will erase the last character typed + +       intr CHAR +              CHAR will send an interrupt signal + +       kill CHAR +              CHAR will erase the current line + +       * lnext CHAR +              CHAR will enter the next character quoted + +       quit CHAR +              CHAR will send a quit signal + +       * rprnt CHAR +              CHAR will redraw the current line + +       start CHAR +              CHAR will restart the output after stopping it + +       stop CHAR +              CHAR will stop the output + +       susp CHAR +              CHAR will send a terminal stop signal + +       * swtch CHAR +              CHAR will switch to a different shell layer + +       * werase CHAR +              CHAR will erase the last word typed + +   Special settings: +       N      set the input and output speeds to N bauds + +       * cols N +              tell the kernel that the terminal has N columns + +       * columns N +              same as cols N + +       ispeed N +              set the input speed to N + +       * line N +              use line discipline N + +       min N  with -icanon, set N characters minimum for a com- +              pleted read + +       ospeed N +              set the output speed to N + +       * rows N +              tell the kernel that the terminal has N rows + +       * size print the number of rows and columns according to +              the kernel + +       speed  print the terminal speed + +       time N with -icanon, set read timeout of N tenths  of  a +              second + +   Control settings: +       [-]clocal +              disable modem control signals + +       [-]cread +              allow input to be received + +       * [-]crtscts +              enable RTS/CTS handshaking + +       csN    set character size to N bits, N in [5..8] + +       [-]cstopb +              use two stop bits per character (one with `-') + +       [-]hup send a hangup signal when the last process closes +              the tty + +       [-]hupcl +              same as [-]hup + +       [-]parenb +              generate parity bit in output and  expect  parity +              bit in input + +       [-]parodd +              set odd parity (even with `-') + +   Input settings: +       [-]brkint +              breaks cause an interrupt signal + +       [-]icrnl +              translate carriage return to newline + +       [-]ignbrk +              ignore break characters + +       [-]igncr +              ignore carriage return + +       [-]ignpar +              ignore characters with parity errors + +       * [-]imaxbel +              beep  and  do  not flush a full input buffer on a +              character + +       [-]inlcr +              translate newline to carriage return + +       [-]inpck +              enable input parity checking + +       [-]istrip +              clear high (8th) bit of input characters + +       * [-]iutf8 +              assume input characters are UTF-8 encoded + +       * [-]iuclc +              translate uppercase characters to lowercase + +       * [-]ixany +              let any character restart output, not only  start +              character + +       [-]ixoff +              enable sending of start/stop characters + +       [-]ixon +              enable XON/XOFF flow control + +       [-]parmrk +              mark   parity   errors  (with  a  255-0-character +              sequence) + +       [-]tandem +              same as [-]ixoff + +   Output settings: +       * bsN  backspace delay style, N in [0..1] + +       * crN  carriage return delay style, N in [0..3] + +       * ffN  form feed delay style, N in [0..1] + +       * nlN  newline delay style, N in [0..1] + +       * [-]ocrnl +              translate carriage return to newline + +       * [-]ofdel +              use delete characters for fill  instead  of  null +              characters + +       * [-]ofill +              use  fill  (padding) characters instead of timing +              for delays + +       * [-]olcuc +              translate lowercase characters to uppercase + +       * [-]onlcr +              translate newline to carriage return-newline + +       * [-]onlret +              newline performs a carriage return + +       * [-]onocr +              do not print carriage returns in the first column + +       [-]opost +              postprocess output + +       * tabN horizontal tab delay style, N in [0..3] + +       * tabs same as tab0 + +       * -tabs +              same as tab3 + +       * vtN  vertical tab delay style, N in [0..1] + +   Local settings: +       [-]crterase +              echo          erase         characters         as +              backspace-space-backspace + +       * crtkill +              kill all line by obeying the  echoprt  and  echoe +              settings + +       * -crtkill +              kill  all  line  by obeying the echoctl and echok +              settings + +       * [-]ctlecho +              echo control characters in hat notation (`^c') + +       [-]echo +              echo input characters + +       * [-]echoctl +              same as [-]ctlecho + +       [-]echoe +              same as [-]crterase + +       [-]echok +              echo a newline after a kill character + +       * [-]echoke +              same as [-]crtkill + +       [-]echonl +              echo newline even if not echoing other characters + +       * [-]echoprt +              echo  erased characters backward, between `\' and +              '/' + +       [-]icanon +              enable erase, kill,  werase,  and  rprnt  special +              characters + +       [-]iexten +              enable non-POSIX special characters + +       [-]isig +              enable interrupt, quit, and suspend special char- +              acters + +       [-]noflsh +              disable flushing after interrupt and quit special +              characters + +       * [-]prterase +              same as [-]echoprt + +       * [-]tostop +              stop  background  jobs  that  try to write to the +              terminal + +       * [-]xcase +              with icanon, escape with `\' for uppercase  char- +              acters + +   Combination settings: +       * [-]LCASE +              same as [-]lcase + +       cbreak same as -icanon + +       -cbreak +              same as icanon + +       cooked same  as  brkint  ignpar  istrip icrnl ixon opost +              isig icanon, eof  and  eol  characters  to  their +              default values + +       -cooked +              same as raw + +       crt    same as echoe echoctl echoke + +       dec    same as echoe echoctl echoke -ixany intr ^c erase +              0177 kill ^u + +       * [-]decctlq +              same as [-]ixany + +       ek     erase and kill characters to their default values + +       evenp  same as parenb -parodd cs7 + +       -evenp same as -parenb cs8 + +       * [-]lcase +              same as xcase iuclc olcuc + +       litout same as -parenb -istrip -opost cs8 + +       -litout +              same as parenb istrip opost cs7 + +       nl     same as -icrnl -onlcr + +       -nl    same as icrnl -inlcr -igncr onlcr -ocrnl -onlret + +       oddp   same as parenb parodd cs7 + +       -oddp  same as -parenb cs8 + +       [-]parity +              same as [-]evenp + +       pass8  same as -parenb -istrip cs8 + +       -pass8 same as parenb istrip cs7 + +       raw    same  as  -ignbrk  -brkint -ignpar -parmrk -inpck +              -istrip  -inlcr  -igncr  -icrnl   -ixon    -ixoff +              -iuclc   -ixany  -imaxbel  -opost  -isig  -icanon +              -xcase min 1 time 0 + +       -raw   same as cooked + +       sane   same as cread -ignbrk brkint -inlcr -igncr  icrnl +              -iutf8  -ixoff -iuclc -ixany imaxbel opost -olcuc +              -ocrnl onlcr -onocr -onlret -ofill -ofdel nl0 cr0 +              tab0  bs0  vt0  ff0 isig icanon iexten echo echoe +              echok -echonl  -noflsh  -xcase  -tostop  -echoprt +              echoctl  echoke,  all special characters to their +              default values. + +       Handle the tty line connected to standard input.   With- +       out  arguments,  prints  baud rate, line discipline, and +       deviations from stty sane.  In settings, CHAR  is  taken +       literally, or coded as in ^c, 0x37, 0177 or 127; special +       values ^- or undef used to disable special characters. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for stty is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and stty programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info stty + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +stty 5.3.0               November 2004                  STTY(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/su.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/su.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..641c0ff --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/su.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +SU(1)                    User Commands                    SU(1) + + + + + +NAME +       su - run a shell with substitute user and group IDs + +SYNOPSIS +       su [OPTION]... [-] [USER [ARG]...] + +DESCRIPTION +       Change  the  effective  user  id and group id to that of +       USER. + +       -, -l, --login +              make the shell a login shell + +       -c, --commmand=COMMAND +              pass a single COMMAND to the shell with -c + +       -f, --fast +              pass -f to the shell (for csh or tcsh) + +       -m, --preserve-environment +              do not reset environment variables + +       -p     same as -m + +       -s, --shell=SHELL +              run SHELL if /etc/shells allows it + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       A mere - implies -l.   If USER not given, assume root. + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for su is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  su  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info su + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +su 5.3.0                 November 2004                    SU(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sum.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sum.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b646973 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sum.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +SUM(1)                   User Commands                   SUM(1) + + + + + +NAME +       sum - checksum and count the blocks in a file + +SYNOPSIS +       sum [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print checksum and block counts for each FILE. + +       -r     defeat -s, use BSD sum algorithm, use 1K blocks + +       -s, --sysv +              use System V sum algorithm, use 512 bytes blocks + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Kayvan Aghaiepour and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for sum is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and sum programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info sum + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sum 5.3.0                November 2004                   SUM(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sync.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sync.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0e5b8a --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/sync.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +SYNC(1)                  User Commands                  SYNC(1) + + + + + +NAME +       sync - flush file system buffers + +SYNOPSIS +       sync [OPTION] + +DESCRIPTION +       Force changed blocks to disk, update the super block. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for sync is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and sync programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info sync + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +sync (coreutils) 5.3.0   November 2004                  SYNC(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tac.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tac.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10828c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tac.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +TAC(1)                   User Commands                   TAC(1) + + + + + +NAME +       tac - concatenate and print files in reverse + +SYNOPSIS +       tac [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Write  each  FILE  to  standard output, last line first. +       With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -b, --before +              attach the separator before instead of after + +       -r, --regex +              interpret the separator as a regular expression + +       -s, --separator=STRING +              use STRING as the separator instead of newline + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jay Lepreau and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for tac is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and tac programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info tac + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tac 5.3.0                December 2004                   TAC(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tail.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tail.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc9401f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tail.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +TAIL(1)                  User Commands                  TAIL(1) + + + + + +NAME +       tail - output the last part of files + +SYNOPSIS +       tail [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print the last 10 lines of each FILE to standard output. +       With more than one FILE, precede each with a header giv- +       ing  the  file  name.   With no FILE, or when FILE is -, +       read standard input. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       --retry +              keep trying to open a file even if it is inacces- +              sible when tail starts or if it becomes  inacces- +              sible later; useful when following by name, i.e., +              with --follow=name + +       -c, --bytes=N +              output the last N bytes + +       -f, --follow[={name|descriptor}] +              output appended  data  as  the  file  grows;  -f, +              --follow, and --follow=descriptor are equivalent + +       -F     same as --follow=name --retry + +       -n, --lines=N +              output the last N lines, instead of the last 10 + +       --max-unchanged-stats=N +              with  --follow=name,  reopen a FILE which has not +              changed size after N (default  5)  iterations  to +              see  if  it has been unlinked or renamed (this is +              the usual case of rotated log files) + +       --pid=PID +              with -f, terminate after process ID, PID dies + +       -q, --quiet, --silent +              never output headers giving file names + +       -s, --sleep-interval=S +              with  -f,  sleep  for  approximately  S   seconds +              (default 1.0) between iterations. + +       -v, --verbose +              always output headers giving file names + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If  the  first  character  of  N (the number of bytes or +       lines) is a `+', print beginning with the Nth item  from +       the  start  of  each  file,  otherwise, print the last N +       items in the file.  N may have a  multiplier  suffix:  b +       512, k 1024, m 1024*1024. + +       With  --follow (-f), tail defaults to following the file +       descriptor, which means that even if a tail'ed  file  is +       renamed,  tail  will  continue  to  track its end.  This +       default behavior is not desirable when you  really  want +       to  track  the  actual  name  of  the file, not the file +       descriptor (e.g., log rotation).  Use  --follow=name  in +       that  case.  That causes tail to track the named file by +       reopening it periodically to see if it has been  removed +       and recreated by some other program. + +AUTHOR +       Written  by  Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, Ian Lance Tay- +       lor, and Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for tail is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and tail programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info tail + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tail 5.3.0               December 2004                  TAIL(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tee.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tee.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..631c857 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tee.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +TEE(1)                   User Commands                   TEE(1) + + + + + +NAME +       tee  -  read  from  standard input and write to standard +       output and files + +SYNOPSIS +       tee [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Copy standard input to each FILE, and also  to  standard +       output. + +       -a, --append +              append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite + +       -i, --ignore-interrupts +              ignore interrupt signals + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If a FILE is -, copy again to standard output. + +AUTHOR +       Written  by  Mike Parker, Richard M. Stallman, and David +       MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for tee is maintained as  a  Tex- +       info  manual.  If the info and tee programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info tee + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tee 5.3.0                November 2004                   TEE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/test.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/test.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84d18d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/test.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +TEST(1)                  User Commands                  TEST(1) + + + + + +NAME +       test - check file types and compare values + +SYNOPSIS +       test EXPRESSION +       test + +       [ EXPRESSION ] +       [ ] +       [ OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Exit with the status determined by EXPRESSION. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       An  omitted  EXPRESSION  defaults  to false.  Otherwise, +       EXPRESSION is true or false and sets exit status.  It is +       one of: + +       ( EXPRESSION ) +              EXPRESSION is true + +       ! EXPRESSION +              EXPRESSION is false + +       EXPRESSION1 -a EXPRESSION2 +              both EXPRESSION1 and EXPRESSION2 are true + +       EXPRESSION1 -o EXPRESSION2 +              either EXPRESSION1 or EXPRESSION2 is true + +       -n STRING +              the length of STRING is nonzero + +       STRING equivalent to -n STRING + +       -z STRING +              the length of STRING is zero + +       STRING1 = STRING2 +              the strings are equal + +       STRING1 != STRING2 +              the strings are not equal + +       INTEGER1 -eq INTEGER2 +              INTEGER1 is equal to INTEGER2 + +       INTEGER1 -ge INTEGER2 +              INTEGER1 is greater than or equal to INTEGER2 + +       INTEGER1 -gt INTEGER2 +              INTEGER1 is greater than INTEGER2 + +       INTEGER1 -le INTEGER2 +              INTEGER1 is less than or equal to INTEGER2 + +       INTEGER1 -lt INTEGER2 +              INTEGER1 is less than INTEGER2 + +       INTEGER1 -ne INTEGER2 +              INTEGER1 is not equal to INTEGER2 + +       FILE1 -ef FILE2 +              FILE1  and  FILE2  have the same device and inode +              numbers + +       FILE1 -nt FILE2 +              FILE1 is newer (modification date) than FILE2 + +       FILE1 -ot FILE2 +              FILE1 is older than FILE2 + +       -b FILE +              FILE exists and is block special + +       -c FILE +              FILE exists and is character special + +       -d FILE +              FILE exists and is a directory + +       -e FILE +              FILE exists + +       -f FILE +              FILE exists and is a regular file + +       -g FILE +              FILE exists and is set-group-ID + +       -G FILE +              FILE exists and is owned by the  effective  group +              ID + +       -h FILE +              FILE exists and is a symbolic link (same as -L) + +       -k FILE +              FILE exists and has its sticky bit set + +       -L FILE +              FILE exists and is a symbolic link (same as -h) + +       -O FILE +              FILE exists and is owned by the effective user ID + +       -p FILE +              FILE exists and is a named pipe + +       -r FILE +              FILE exists and read permission is granted + +       -s FILE +              FILE exists and has a size greater than zero + +       -S FILE +              FILE exists and is a socket + +       -t FD  file descriptor FD is opened on a terminal + +       -u FILE +              FILE exists and its set-user-ID bit is set + +       -w FILE +              FILE exists and write permission is granted + +       -x FILE +              FILE exists and execute (or search) permission is +              granted + +       Except for -h and -L, all FILE-related tests dereference +       symbolic links.  Beware  that  parentheses  need  to  be +       escaped  (e.g., by backslashes) for shells.  INTEGER may +       also be -l STRING, which  evaluates  to  the  length  of +       STRING. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Kevin Braunsdorf and Matthew Bradburn. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for test is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and test programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info test + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +test 5.3.0               November 2004                  TEST(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/touch.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/touch.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b7513e --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/touch.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +TOUCH(1)                 User Commands                 TOUCH(1) + + + + + +NAME +       touch - change file timestamps + +SYNOPSIS +       touch [OPTION]... FILE... + +DESCRIPTION +       Update the access and modification times of each FILE to +       the current time. + +       Mandatory arguments to long options  are  mandatory  for +       short options too. + +       -a     change only the access time + +       -c, --no-create +              do not create any files + +       -d, --date=STRING +              parse STRING and use it instead of current time + +       -f     (ignored) + +       -m     change only the modification time + +       -r, --reference=FILE +              use this file's times instead of current time + +       -t STAMP +              use [[CC]YY]MMDDhhmm[.ss] instead of current time + +       --time=WORD +              change the specified time: WORD is access, atime, +              or use: equivalent to -a WORD is modify or mtime: +              equivalent to -m + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       Note  that  the  -d  and  -t  options  accept  different +       time-date formats. + +AUTHOR +       Written  by  Paul  Rubin,  Arnold  Robbins, Jim Kingdon, +       David MacKenzie, and Randy Smith. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for touch is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and touch programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info touch + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +touch 5.3.0              November 2004                 TOUCH(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tr.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tr.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57bc3e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tr.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +TR(1)                    User Commands                    TR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       tr - translate or delete characters + +SYNOPSIS +       tr [OPTION]... SET1 [SET2] + +DESCRIPTION +       Translate,  squeeze, and/or delete characters from stan- +       dard input, writing to standard output. + +       -c, -C, --complement +              first complement SET1 + +       -d, --delete +              delete characters in SET1, do not translate + +       -s, --squeeze-repeats +              replace each input sequence of a repeated charac- +              ter  that  is listed in SET1 with a single occur- +              rence of that character + +       -t, --truncate-set1 +              first truncate SET1 to length of SET2 + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SETs are specified as strings of characters.  Most  rep- +       resent themselves.  Interpreted sequences are: + +       \NNN   character with octal value NNN (1 to 3 octal dig- +              its) + +       \\     backslash + +       \a     audible BEL + +       \b     backspace + +       \f     form feed + +       \n     new line + +       \r     return + +       \t     horizontal tab + +       \v     vertical tab + +       CHAR1-CHAR2 +              all characters from CHAR1 to CHAR2  in  ascending +              order + +       [CHAR*] +              in SET2, copies of CHAR until length of SET1 + +       [CHAR*REPEAT] +              REPEAT  copies  of CHAR, REPEAT octal if starting +              with 0 + +       [:alnum:] +              all letters and digits + +       [:alpha:] +              all letters + +       [:blank:] +              all horizontal whitespace + +       [:cntrl:] +              all control characters + +       [:digit:] +              all digits + +       [:graph:] +              all printable characters, not including space + +       [:lower:] +              all lower case letters + +       [:print:] +              all printable characters, including space + +       [:punct:] +              all punctuation characters + +       [:space:] +              all horizontal or vertical whitespace + +       [:upper:] +              all upper case letters + +       [:xdigit:] +              all hexadecimal digits + +       [=CHAR=] +              all characters which are equivalent to CHAR + +       Translation occurs if -d is not given and both SET1  and +       SET2  appear.   -t  may  be  used only when translating. +       SET2 is extended to length of SET1 by repeating its last +       character  as  necessary.  Excess characters of SET2 are +       ignored.  Only [:lower:] and [:upper:] are guaranteed to +       expand  in ascending order; used in SET2 while translat- +       ing, they may only be used in pairs to specify case con- +       version.   -s uses SET1 if not translating nor deleting; +       else squeezing uses SET2 and occurs after translation or +       deletion. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for tr is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.  If  the  info  and  tr  programs  are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info tr + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tr 5.3.0                 November 2004                    TR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/true.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/true.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8931d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/true.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +TRUE(1)                  User Commands                  TRUE(1) + + + + + +NAME +       true - do nothing, successfully + +SYNOPSIS +       true [ignored command line arguments] +       true OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Exit with a status code indicating success. + +       These option names may not be abbreviated. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Jim Meyering. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full documentation for true is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and true programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info true + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +true 5.3.0               November 2004                  TRUE(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tsort.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tsort.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..724d404 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tsort.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +TSORT(1)                 User Commands                 TSORT(1) + + + + + +NAME +       tsort - perform topological sort + +SYNOPSIS +       tsort [OPTION] [FILE] + +DESCRIPTION +       Write  totally  ordered list consistent with the partial +       ordering in FILE.  With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read +       standard input. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Mark Kettenis. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for tsort is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and tsort programs  are  prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info tsort + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tsort (coreutils) 5.3.0  November 2004                 TSORT(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tty.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tty.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb23ff3 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/tty.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +TTY(1)                   User Commands                   TTY(1) + + + + + +NAME +       tty  -  print the file name of the terminal connected to +       standard input + +SYNOPSIS +       tty [OPTION]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print the file name of the terminal connected  to  stan- +       dard input. + +       -s, --silent, --quiet +              print nothing, only return an exit status + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for tty is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and tty programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info tty + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +tty 5.3.0                November 2004                   TTY(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uname.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uname.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..43c2a1f --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uname.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +UNAME(1)                 User Commands                 UNAME(1) + + + + + +NAME +       uname - print system information + +SYNOPSIS +       uname [OPTION]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print  certain system information.  With no OPTION, same +       as -s. + +       -a, --all +              print all information, in the following order: + +       -s, --kernel-name +              print the kernel name + +       -n, --nodename +              print the network node hostname + +       -r, --kernel-release +              print the kernel release + +       -v, --kernel-version +              print the kernel version + +       -m, --machine +              print the machine hardware name + +       -p, --processor +              print the processor type + +       -i, --hardware-platform +              print the hardware platform + +       -o, --operating-system +              print the operating system + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for uname is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and uname programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info uname + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +uname 5.3.0              November 2004                 UNAME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unexpand.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unexpand.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d2c73b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unexpand.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +UNEXPAND(1)              User Commands              UNEXPAND(1) + + + + + +NAME +       unexpand - convert spaces to tabs + +SYNOPSIS +       unexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Convert blanks in each FILE to tabs, writing to standard +       output.  With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read  standard +       input. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -a, --all +              convert  all  blanks,  instead  of  just  initial +              blanks + +       --first-only  convert  only  leading sequences of blanks +              (overrides -a) + +       -t, --tabs=N +              have  tabs  N  characters  apart  instead  of   8 +              (enables -a) + +       -t, --tabs=LIST +              use   comma   separated  LIST  of  tab  positions +              (enables -a) + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       expand(1) + +       The full documentation for unexpand is maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If the info and unexpand programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info unexpand + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +unexpand 5.3.0           November 2004              UNEXPAND(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uniq.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uniq.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4988db --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uniq.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +UNIQ(1)                  User Commands                  UNIQ(1) + + + + + +NAME +       uniq - report or omit repeated lines + +SYNOPSIS +       uniq [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]] + +DESCRIPTION +       Discard  all  but one of successive identical lines from +       INPUT (or standard input), writing to OUTPUT  (or  stan- +       dard output). + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -c, --count +              prefix lines by the number of occurrences + +       -d, --repeated +              only print duplicate lines + +       -D, --all-repeated[=delimit-method] print all  duplicate +       lines +              delimit-method={none(default),prepend,separate} +              Delimiting is done with blank lines. + +       -f, --skip-fields=N +              avoid comparing the first N fields + +       -i, --ignore-case +              ignore differences in case when comparing + +       -s, --skip-chars=N +              avoid comparing the first N characters + +       -u, --unique +              only print unique lines + +       -w, --check-chars=N +              compare no more than N characters in lines + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       A  field  is  a  run  of whitespace, then non-whitespace +       characters.  Fields are skipped before chars. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for uniq is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and uniq programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info uniq + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +uniq 5.3.0               December 2004                  UNIQ(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unlink.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unlink.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3267e2b --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/unlink.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +UNLINK(1)                User Commands                UNLINK(1) + + + + + +NAME +       unlink  -  call the unlink function to remove the speci- +       fied file + +SYNOPSIS +       unlink FILE +       unlink OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Call the unlink function to remove the specified FILE. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Michael Stone. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for unlink  is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the  info and unlink programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info unlink + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +unlink 5.3.0             November 2004                UNLINK(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uptime.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uptime.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16ddbbf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/uptime.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +UPTIME(1)                User Commands                UPTIME(1) + + + + + +NAME +       uptime - tell how long the system has been running + +SYNOPSIS +       uptime [OPTION]... [ FILE ] + +DESCRIPTION +       Print  the  current  time, the length of time the system +       has been up, the number of users on the system, and  the +       average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, +       5 and  15  minutes.   If  FILE  is  not  specified,  use +       /var/run/utmp.  /var/log/wtmp as FILE is common. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written  by Joseph Arceneaux, David MacKenzie, and Kaveh +       Ghazi. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for uptime  is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the  info and uptime programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info uptime + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +uptime 5.3.0             November 2004                UPTIME(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/users.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/users.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9146363 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/users.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +USERS(1)                 User Commands                 USERS(1) + + + + + +NAME +       users  -  print the user names of users currently logged +       in to the current host + +SYNOPSIS +       users [OPTION]... [ FILE ] + +DESCRIPTION +       Output who is currently logged in according to FILE.  If +       FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp.  /var/log/wtmp +       as FILE is common. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Joseph Arceneaux and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for users is maintained as a Tex- +       info  manual.   If the info and users programs are prop- +       erly installed at your site, the command + +              info users + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +users 5.3.0              November 2004                 USERS(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/vdir.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/vdir.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aaae259 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/vdir.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +VDIR(1)                  User Commands                  VDIR(1) + + + + + +NAME +       vdir - list directory contents + +SYNOPSIS +       vdir [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       List  information about the FILEs (the current directory +       by default).  Sort entries  alphabetically  if  none  of +       -cftuSUX nor --sort. + +       Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for +       short options too. + +       -a, --all +              do not ignore entries starting with . + +       -A, --almost-all +              do not list implied . and .. + +       --author +              with -l, print the author of each file + +       -b, --escape +              print octal escapes for nongraphic characters + +       --block-size=SIZE +              use SIZE-byte blocks + +       -B, --ignore-backups +              do not list implied entries ending with ~ + +       -c     with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of  last +              modification of file status information) with -l: +              show ctime and sort by name  otherwise:  sort  by +              ctime + +       -C     list entries by columns + +       --color[=WHEN] +              control whether color is used to distinguish file +              types.  WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto' + +       -d, --directory +              list directory entries instead of  contents,  and +              do not dereference symbolic links + +       -D, --dired +              generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode + +       -f     do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst + +       -F, --classify +              append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries + +       --format=WORD +              across  -x,  commas  -m,  horizontal -x, long -l, +              single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C + +       --full-time +              like -l --time-style=full-iso + +       -g     like -l, but do not list owner + +       -G, --no-group +              like -l, but do not list group + +       -h, --human-readable +              with -l, print sizes  in  human  readable  format +              (e.g., 1K 234M 2G) + +       --si   likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024 + +       -H, --dereference-command-line +              follow symbolic links listed on the command line + +       --dereference-command-line-symlink-to-dir +              follow  each  command  line  symbolic  link  that +              points to a directory + +       --hide=PATTERN +              do not list implied entries matching  shell  PAT- +              TERN (overridden by -a or -A) + +       --indicator-style=WORD  append indicator with style WORD +       to entry names: +              none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p) + +       -i, --inode +              with -l, print the index number of each file + +       -I, --ignore=PATTERN +              do  not  list implied entries matching shell PAT- +              TERN + +       -k     like --block-size=1K + +       -l     use a long listing format + +       -L, --dereference +              when showing  file  information  for  a  symbolic +              link, show information for the file the link ref- +              erences rather than for the link itself + +       -m     fill width with a comma separated list of entries + +       -n, --numeric-uid-gid +              like -l, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs + +       -N, --literal +              print  raw  entry names (don't treat e.g. control +              characters specially) + +       -o     like -l, but do not list group information + +       -p, --file-type +              append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries + +       -q, --hide-control-chars +              print ? instead of non graphic characters + +       --show-control-chars +              show non graphic characters as-is (default unless +              program is `ls' and output is a terminal) + +       -Q, --quote-name +              enclose entry names in double quotes + +       --quoting-style=WORD +              use  quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, +              locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape + +       -r, --reverse +              reverse order while sorting + +       -R, --recursive +              list subdirectories recursively + +       -s, --size +              with -l, print size of each file, in blocks + +       -S     sort by file size + +       --sort=WORD +              extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t,  version +              -v,  status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use +              -u + +       --time=WORD +              with -l, show time as WORD instead  of  modifica- +              tion  time:  atime, access, use, ctime or status; +              use specified time as sort key if --sort=time + +       --time-style=STYLE +              with -l, show times using style STYLE:  full-iso, +              long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT.  FORMAT is inter- +              preted like `date';  if  FORMAT  is  FORMAT1<new- +              line>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to non-recent files +              and FORMAT2 to recent files; if STYLE is prefixed +              with  `posix-',  STYLE  takes effect only outside +              the POSIX locale + +       -t     sort by modification time + +       -T, --tabsize=COLS +              assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8 + +       -u     with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: +              show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort +              by access time + +       -U     do not sort; list entries in directory order + +       -v     sort by version + +       -w, --width=COLS +              assume screen width instead of current value + +       -x     list entries by lines instead of by columns + +       -X     sort alphabetically by entry extension + +       -1     list one file per line + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       SIZE may be (or may be an  integer  optionally  followed +       by)  one  of following: kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1000*1000, M +       1024*1024, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y. + +       By default, color is not used to  distinguish  types  of +       files.  That is equivalent to using --color=none.  Using +       the --color option without the optional WHEN argument is +       equivalent  to using --color=always.  With --color=auto, +       color codes are output only if standard output  is  con- +       nected to a terminal (tty). + +       Exit  status is 0 if OK, 1 if minor problems, 2 if seri- +       ous trouble. + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for vdir is maintained as a  Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and vdir programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info vdir + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +vdir 5.3.0               December 2004                  VDIR(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/wc.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/wc.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2038c23 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/wc.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +WC(1)                    User Commands                    WC(1) + + + + + +NAME +       wc  -  print the number of newlines, words, and bytes in +       files + +SYNOPSIS +       wc [OPTION]... [FILE]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print newline, word, and byte counts for each FILE,  and +       a  total  line if more than one FILE is specified.  With +       no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. + +       -c, --bytes +              print the byte counts + +       -m, --chars +              print the character counts + +       -l, --lines +              print the newline counts + +       -L, --max-line-length +              print the length of the longest line + +       -w, --words +              print the word counts + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Paul Rubin and David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for wc is maintained as a Texinfo +       manual.   If  the  info  and  wc  programs  are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info wc + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +wc 5.3.0                 November 2004                    WC(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/who.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/who.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1520566 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/who.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +WHO(1)                   User Commands                   WHO(1) + + + + + +NAME +       who - show who is logged on + +SYNOPSIS +       who [OPTION]... [ FILE | ARG1 ARG2 ] + +DESCRIPTION +       -a, --all +              same as -b -d --login -p -r -t -T -u + +       -b, --boot +              time of last system boot + +       -d, --dead +              print dead processes + +       -H, --heading +              print line of column headings + +       -i, --idle +              add  idle time as HOURS:MINUTES, . or old (depre- +              cated, use -u) + +       -l, --login +              print system login processes + +       --lookup +              attempt to canonicalize hostnames via DNS + +       -m     only hostname and user associated with stdin + +       -p, --process +              print active processes spawned by init + +       -q, --count +              all login names and number of users logged on + +       -r, --runlevel +              print current runlevel + +       -s, --short +              print only name, line, and time (default) + +       -t, --time +              print last system clock change + +       -T, -w, --mesg +              add user's message status as +, - or ? + +       -u, --users +              list users logged in + +       --message +              same as -T + +       --writable +              same as -T + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +       If   FILE   is   not   specified,   use   /var/run/utmp. +       /var/log/wtmp as FILE is common.  If ARG1 ARG2 given, -m +       presumed: `am i' or `mom likes' are usual. + +AUTHOR +       Written  by  Joseph  Arceneaux,  David  MacKenzie,   and +       Michael Stone. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The  full  documentation for who is maintained as a Tex- +       info manual.  If the info and who programs are  properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info who + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +who 5.3.0                November 2004                   WHO(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/whoami.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/whoami.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..042e606 --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/whoami.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +WHOAMI(1)                User Commands                WHOAMI(1) + + + + + +NAME +       whoami - print effective userid + +SYNOPSIS +       whoami [OPTION]... + +DESCRIPTION +       Print  the  user name associated with the current effec- +       tive user id.  Same as id -un. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by Richard Mlynarik. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for whoami  is  maintained  as  a +       Texinfo  manual.   If  the  info and whoami programs are +       properly installed at your site, the command + +              info whoami + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +whoami 5.3.0             November 2004                WHOAMI(1) diff --git a/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/yes.1.txt b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/yes.1.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14757bf --- /dev/null +++ b/coreutils-5.3.0-bin/man/cat1/yes.1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +YES(1)                   User Commands                   YES(1) + + + + + +NAME +       yes - output a string repeatedly until killed + +SYNOPSIS +       yes [STRING]... +       yes OPTION + +DESCRIPTION +       Repeatedly  output  a line with all specified STRING(s), +       or `y'. + +       --help display this help and exit + +       --version +              output version information and exit + +AUTHOR +       Written by David MacKenzie. + +REPORTING BUGS +       Report bugs to <bug-coreutils@gnu.org>. + +COPYRIGHT +       Copyright (C) 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +       This is free software; see the source for copying condi- +       tions.  There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABIL- +       ITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +SEE ALSO +       The full documentation for yes is maintained as  a  Tex- +       info  manual.  If the info and yes programs are properly +       installed at your site, the command + +              info yes + +       should give you access to the complete manual. + + + +yes 5.3.0                December 2004                   YES(1) | 
